Container Refrigeration

OPERATIONS AND SERVICE

MANUAL
For

69NT40-561-300 to 399
Container Refrigeration Units

T-365 Rev B
OPERATIONS AND SERVICE
MANUAL
For

69NT40-561-300 to 399

© Carrier Corporation, 2014 Printed in U. S. A. August 2014

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

SAFETY SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 FIRST AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.1 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.2 Temperature Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.3 Pressure Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.4 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.5 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.6 Condenser Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.7 Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.8 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3.9 Plate Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.2 Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.4.3 USDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.4 Interrogator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.6 Quest − CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.8 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.9 Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.10 Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.11 Thermometer Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.12 Back Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.13 460 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.14 230 Volt Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.15 Cable Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.16 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.17 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.18 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.19 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2
2.4.20 Condenser Grille . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.21 eAutoFresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
2.4.22 XtendFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

i T-365 Rev B
 3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1.3 Evaporator Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.1.4 Compressor Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.1.5 Air−Cooled Condenser Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
3.1.6 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.1.7 Communications Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–6
3.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5.1 Standard Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5.2 Economized Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.5.3 Economizer Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1.1 Key Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.1.2 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.1.3 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.3 CONTROLLER SEQUENCE AND MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.2 Start up - Compressor Bump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.4 Perishable Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.5 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.6 Perishable Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.7 Perishable Pulldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.10 Perishable Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling − Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.20 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.21 Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.3.22 Defrost Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.4.2 Failure Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12

T-365 Rev B ii
 4.4.3 Generator Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.4.5 Compressor Low Pressure Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.4.6 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.4.7 Condenser Fan Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.5 QUEST − CCPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–13
4.7 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.8 DATACORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.8.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.8.2 DataCORDER Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.9 Pre−Trip Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–18
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–19
4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.8.14 ISO Trip Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–20
4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–32
4.12 CONTROLLER PRE−TRIP TEST CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–46
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INSPECTION (BEFORE LOADING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 CONNECT POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.2 Connection To 190/230 VAC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.4 EAUTOFRESH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–5
5.6.1 Starting the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.6.2 Stopping the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.7 START−UP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.7.1 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder DataCORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6

iii T-365 Rev B

 5.7.4 Complete Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.8 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.9 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–2
6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–3
6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–4
6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–5
6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–6
6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
6.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
6.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–8
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.2 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.3 Complete System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
7.6.4 Partial System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.8 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–6
7.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
7.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.10 CONDENSER COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
7.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
7.11 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
7.12 FILTER DRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.13 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13

T-365 Rev B iv
 7.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
7.14 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.14.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.14.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.14.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
7.15 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
7.16 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.16.1 Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and Strainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.17 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
7.18 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.18.1 Economizer Expansion Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
7.19 TROUBLESHOOTING P6-7 (DLV/DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.19.1 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.19.2 Digital Loader Valve and Unloader Valve (DLV/DUV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
7.20 DIGITAL LOADER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.20.1 Digital Loader Valve Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.20.2 Digital Loader Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
7.21 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.21.1 Digital Unloader Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
7.22 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
7.23 AUTOTRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
7.24 CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.24.1 Handling Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.24.2 Controller Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
7.24.3 Controller Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.24.4 Programming Procedure for Software Versions 5354 & Greater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–24
7.24.5 Removing and Installing a Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
7.24.6 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.25 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.25.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
7.25.2 Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
7.25.3 Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.25.4 Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.25.5 Sensor DTS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.25.6 Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.25.7 Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
7.26 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
7.27.3 Checking the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
7.27.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
7.28 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
7.29 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INDEX–1

v T-365 Rev B
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section ................................................. 3–1

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section ............................................................ 3–2
Figure 3.3 Compressor Section ........................................................... 3–3
Figure 3.4 Air-Cooled Condenser Section ................................................... 3–4
Figure 3.5 Control Box Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Figure 3.6 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Standard Operation ................................ 3–10
Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Economized Operation ............................. 3–11
Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System .................................................... 4–1
Figure 4.2 Key Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Figure 4.3 Display Module ............................................................... 4–3
Figure 4.4 Control Module ............................................................... 4–4
Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode ............................................ 4–6
Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling ....................................................... 4–7
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating ....................................................... 4–8
Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode ............................................... 4–9
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode ................................................................ 4–10
Figure 4.10 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–17
Figure 4.12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–31
Figure 5.1 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart .............................................. 5–2
Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set ....................................................... 7–2
Figure 7.3 Service Valve ................................................................ 7–2
Figure 7.4 Refrig. System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit ............................................................... 7–7
Figure 7.6 Compressor Ports/Connections .................................................. 7–8
Figure 7.7 Lubricating Orange Gasket ...................................................... 7–8
Figure 7.8 Installing Orange Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
Figure 7.9 Power Plug Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
Figure 7.10 Power Plug Secured .......................................................... 7–9
Figure 7.11 High Pressure Switch Testing .................................................. 7–10
Figure 7.12 Condenser Fan Position ...................................................... 7–12
Figure 7.13 Heater Arrangement ......................................................... 7–14
Figure 7.14 Evaporator Fan Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
Figure 7.15 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
Figure 7.16 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) .................................... 7–16
Figure 7.17 Economizer Expansion Valve .................................................. 7–17
Figure 7.18 DLV Installation ............................................................. 7–20
Figure 7.19 DUV Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
Figure 7.20 Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
Figure 7.21 Controller Section of the Control Box ............................................ 7–23

vii T-365 Rev B

Figure 7.22 Sensor Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
Figure 7.23 Sensor and Cable Splice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
Figure 7.24 Supply Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
Figure 7.25 Return Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
Figure 7.26 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
Figure 7.27 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
Figure 7.28 Stepper Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
Figure 7.29 Jumper Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
Figure 7.30 Motor Cup Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
Figure 7.31 Communications Interface Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
Figure 8.1 Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
Figure 8.2 Unit Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
Figure 8.3 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–3
Figure 8.4 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4

T-365 Rev B viii

 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page

Table 3–1 Refrigeration System Data ...................................................... 3–6

Table 3–2 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES ............................................ 3–8
Table 4–1 Key Pad Function ............................................................. 4–2
Table 4–2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations ........................................... 4–18
Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–21
Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–22
Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Codes ........................................................ 4–32
Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes .................................................. 4–46
Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments ........................................ 4–53
Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records ........................................... 4–54
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–55
Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays ................................................. 7–22
Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance ........................................................... 7–28
Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance ........................................................... 7–29
Table 7–4 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart ............................................ 7–36
Table 7–5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37

ix T-365 Rev B
 SECTION 1
SAFETY SUMMARY
1.1 GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES When performing any arc welding on the unit or con-
tainer, disconnect all wire harness connectors from the
Installation and servicing of refrigeration equipment
modules in control boxes. Do not remove wire harness
can be hazardous due to system pressures and electri-
from the modules unless you are grounded to the unit
cal components. Only trained and qualified service per-
frame with a static safe wrist strap.
sonnel should install, repair, or service refrigeration
equipment. When working on refrigeration equipment, In case of electrical fire, open circuit switch and extin-
observe all potential Danger, Warning and Caution guish with CO2 (never use water).
hazards, including those shown below and on hazard
labels attached to the unit. 1.5 SPECIFIC HAZARD STATEMENTS
The following general safety notices supplement spe- To help identify the label hazards on the unit and
cific warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in this explain the level of awareness each one carries, an
manual. They are recommended precautions that must explanation is given with the appropriate conse-
be understood and applied during operation and main- quences:
tenance of the equipment covered herein. The general
safety notices are presented in the following three sec-
tions labeled: First Aid, Operating Precautions and ! DANGER
Maintenance Precautions. A listing of the specific
Means an immediate hazard that WILL
warnings and cautions appearing elsewhere in the
result in severe personal injury or death.
manual follows the general safety notices.

1.2 FIRST AID

An injury, no matter how slight, should never go unat-
! WARNING
tended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention Means to warn against hazards or unsafe
immediately. conditions that COULD result in severe
personal injury or death.
1.3 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Always wear safety glasses. ! CAUTION
Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of the evaporator
and condenser fans. Means to warn against potential hazard
or unsafe practice that could result in
Wear appropriate personal protective equipment for personal injury, product or property dam-
the work being undertaken. age.
No work should be performed on the unit until all circuit The statements listed below are applicable to the
breakers and start-stop switches are turned off, and refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this manual.
power supply is disconnected. These recommended precautions must be understood
In case of severe vibration or unusual noise, stop the and applied during operation and maintenance of the
unit and investigate. equipment covered herein.

1.4 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

Beware of unannounced starting of the evaporator and
! WARNING
condenser fans. Do not remove the condenser fan EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow
grille or evaporator access panels before turning power this WARNING can result in death, seri-
off, disconnecting and securing the power plug. ous personal injury and / or property
Be sure power is turned off before working on motors, damage.
controllers, solenoid valves and electrical control Never use air or gas mixtures containing
switches. Tag circuit breaker and power supply to pre- oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating
vent accidental energizing of circuit. the product.
Charge Only With R−134a:
Do not bypass any electrical safety devices, e.g. bridg-
Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Stan-
ing an overload, or using any sort of jumper wires.
dard 700 specification.
Problems with the system should be diagnosed, and
any necessary repairs performed by qualified service
personnel.

1–1 T-365 Rev B

 ! WARNING ! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the Oakite No. 32 is an acid. Be sure that the
evaporator and condenser fans. The unit acid is slowly added to the water. DO
may cycle the fans and compressor NOT PUT WATER INTO THE ACID - this
unexpectedly as control requirements will cause spattering and excessive heat.
dictate.

! WARNING
! WARNING Wear rubber gloves and wash the solu-
Do not attempt to remove power plug(s) tion from the skin immediately if acciden-
before turning OFF start-stop switch (ST), tal contact occurs. Do not allow the
unit circuit breaker(s) and external power solution to splash onto concrete.
source.

! WARNING
! WARNING Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers
Make sure the power plugs are clean and (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main
dry before connecting to power receptacle. power supply before working on moving
parts.

! WARNING
Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s)
! WARNING
(CB-1 & CB-2) and the START-STOP Installation requires wiring to the main
switch (ST) are in the “O” (OFF) position unit circuit breaker, CB1. Make sure the
before connecting to any electrical power power to the unit is off and power plug
source. disconnected before beginning installa-
tion.

! WARNING
Make sure power to the unit is OFF and
! CAUTION
power plug disconnected before replac- Charge water−cooled condenser or
ing the compressor. receiver according to nameplate specifi-
cations to ensure optimal unit perfor-
mance.
! WARNING
Before disassembly of the compressor, CAUTION
be sure to relieve the internal pressure
!
very carefully by slightly loosening the Do not remove wire harnesses from con-
couplings to break the seal. troller modules unless you are grounded
to the unit frame with a static safe wrist
strap.
! WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a CAUTION
pressure regulator.
!
Unplug all controller module wire har-
ness connectors before performing arc
! WARNING welding on any part of the container.
Do not remove the condenser fan grille
before turning power OFF and discon- CAUTION
necting power plug.
!
Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in
an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are
physically different and will result in
damage to the controller.

T-365 Rev B 1–2

 ! CAUTION ! CAUTION
Pre-trip inspection should not be per- To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in
formed with critical temperature cargoes the manifold gauge set be sure set is
in the container. brought to suction pressure before dis-
connecting.

! CAUTION
When Pre-Trip key is pressed, economy,
! CAUTION
dehumidification and bulb mode will be The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
deactivated. At the completion of Pre-Trip tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
activity, economy, dehumidification and compressor to evacuate the system
bulb mode must be reactivated. below 0 psig. Never operate the compres-
sor with the suction or discharge service
valves closed (frontseated). Internal dam-
! CAUTION age will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.
When condenser water flow is below 11
lpm (3 gpm) or when water-cooled opera-
tion is not in use, the CFS switch MUST CAUTION
be set to position “1” or the unit will not
!
operate properly. Take necessary steps (place plywood
over coil or use sling on motor) to pre-
vent motor from falling into condenser
! CAUTION coil.
When a failure occurs during automatic
testing, the unit will suspend operation CAUTION
awaiting operator intervention.
!
The unit must be OFF whenever a pro-
gramming card is inserted or removed
! CAUTION from the controller programming port.
When Pre-Trip test Auto 2 runs to com-
pletion without being interrupted, the unit CAUTION
will terminate pre-trip and display “Auto
!
2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid
until the user depresses the ENTER key! nicking or cutting wires.

! CAUTION ! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to oper- Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice
ate in reverse for more than two minutes area as this may affect sensor resistance.
will result in internal compressor dam-
age. Turn the start-stop switch OFF
immediately.

1–3 T-365 Rev B

T-365 Rev B

SECTION 2
INTRODUCTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION 2.3.3 Pressure Readout
The Carrier Transicold model 69NT40−561−300 The unit is fitted with evaporator, suction, and dis-
through 399 series units are of lightweight aluminum charge pressure transducers. The transducer readings
frame construction, designed to fit in the front of a con- may be viewed on the controller display.
tainer and serve as the container’s front wall.
2.3.4 Compressor
They are one piece, self−contained, all electric units,
which include cooling and heating systems to provide The unit is fitted with a scroll compressor equipped with
precise temperature control. suction and discharge service connections.
The units are supplied with a complete charge of refrig- 2.3.5 Condenser Coil
erant R−134a and compressor lubricating oil, and are
The unit is fitted with a two−row square formed con-
ready for operation upon installation. Forklift pockets
denser coil using 7mm tubing.
are provided for unit installation and removal.
The base unit operates on nominal 380/460 volt, 2.3.6 Condenser Fan Operation
3−phase, 50/60 hertz (Hz) power. An optional auto- Units are equipped with a three phase, dual speed con-
transformer may be fitted to allow operation on nominal denser fan motor. Opening of condenser fan motor
190/230, 3−phase, 50/60 Hz power. Control system internal protector will stop the fan motor and the con-
power is provided by a transformer which steps the troller will subsequently shut down the compressor.
supply power down to 18 and 24 volts, single phase.
The controller is a Carrier Transicold Micro−Link 3 2.3.7 Evaporator
microprocessor. The controller operates automatically The evaporator section is equipped with an electronic
to select cooling, holding or heating as required to expansion valve (EEV).
maintain the desired set point temperature within very
close limits. 2.3.8 Evaporator Fan Operation
The controller has a keypad and display for viewing or Units are equipped with three−phase evaporator fan
changing operating parameters. The display is also motors. Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector
equipped with lights to indicate various modes of oper- will shut down the unit.
ation.
2.3.9 Plate Set
2.2 CONFIGURATION IDENTIFICATION Each unit is equipped with a tethered set of wiring
Unit identification information is provided on a plate schematics and wiring diagram plates. The plate sets
located on the back wall of the condenser section. The are ordered using a seven−digit base part number and
plate provides the unit model number, the unit serial a two−digit dash number.
number and the unit parts identification number (PID).
The model number identifies the overall unit configura- 2.4 OPTION DESCRIPTIONS
tion, while the PID number provides information on Various options may be factory or field equipped to the
specific optional equipment, factory provisioned to base unit. These options are described in the following
allow for field installation of optional equipment and dif- sub−paragraphs.
ferences in detailed parts.
2.4.1 Battery
2.3 FEATURE DESCRIPTIONS The refrigeration controller may be fitted with standard
replaceable batteries or a rechargeable battery pack.
2.3.1 Control Box
Rechargeable battery packs may be fitted in the stan-
Units are equipped with an aluminum control box, and dard location or in a secure location.
may be fitted with a lockable door.
2.4.2 Dehumidification
2.3.2 Temperature Readout
The unit may be fitted with a humidity sensor. This sen-
The unit is fitted with suction and discharge refrigerant sor allows setting of a humidity set point in the control-
temperature sensors. The sensor readings may be ler. In dehumidification mode, the controller will operate
viewed on the controller display. to reduce internal container moisture level.

2–1 T-365 Rev B

2.4.3 USDA 2.4.11 Thermometer Port
The unit may be supplied with fittings for additional The unit may be fitted with ports in the front of the
temperature probes, which allow recording of USDA frame for insertion of a thermometer to measure supply
Cold Treatment data by the integral DataCORDER and/or return air temperature. If fitted, the port(s) will
function of the Micro−Link refrigeration controller. require a cap and chain.

2.4.4 Interrogator 2.4.12 Back Panels

Units that use the DataCORDER function are fitted with Aluminum back panels may have access doors and/or
interrogator receptacles for connection of equipment to hinge mounting.
download the recorded data. Two receptacles may be
fitted; one is accessible from the front of the container 2.4.13 460 Volt Cable
and the other is mounted inside the container (with the Various power cable and plug designs are available for
USDA receptacles). the main 460 volt supply. The plug options tailor the
cables to each customer’s requirements.
2.4.5 Remote Monitoring
The unit may be fitted with a remote monitoring recep- 2.4.14 230 Volt Cable
tacle. This item allows connection of remote indicators Units equipped with an autotransformer require an
for COOL, DEFROST and IN RANGE. Unless other- additional power cable for connection to the 230 volt
wise indicated, the receptacle is mounted at the control source. Various power cable and plug designs are
box location. available. The plug options tailor the cables to each
customer’s requirements.
2.4.6 Quest − CCPC
Compressor−Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a 2.4.15 Cable Restraint
method of temperature control used during Various designs are available for storage of the power
steady−state perishable cooling that cycles the com- cables. These options are variations of the compressor
pressor on and off according to supply / return air tem- section cable guard.
perature conditions.
2.4.16 Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
2.4.7 Communications Interface Module
The unit may be fitted with an upper fresh air makeup
The unit may be fitted with a communications interface assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available
module. The communications interface module is a with a vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be
slave module which allows communication with a mas- fitted with screens.
ter central monitoring station. The module will respond
to communication and return information over the main 2.4.17 Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up)
power line. Refer to the ship master system technical The unit may be fitted with a lower fresh air makeup
manual for further information. assembly. The fresh air makeup assembly is available
with a vent positioning sensor (VPS) and may also be
2.4.8 Autotransformer
fitted with screens.
An autotransformer may be provided to allow operation
on 190/230, 3−phase, 50/60 Hz power. The autotrans- 2.4.18 Labels
former raises the supply voltage to the nominal 380/ Safety Instruction and Function Code listing labels dif-
460 volt power required by the base unit. The auto- fer depending on the options installed. Labels available
transformer may also be fitted with an individual circuit with additional languages are listed in the parts list.
breaker for the 230 volt power.
If the unit is equipped with an autotransformer and 2.4.19 Controller
communications module, the autotransformer will be Two replacement controllers are available:
fitted with a transformer bridge unit (TBU) to assist in
communications. 1. Re−manufactured − Controller is the equivalent
of a new OEM controller and is supplied with a
2.4.9 Gutters 12−month warranty.
Rain gutters may be fitted over the control box to divert 2. Repaired − Controller has had previous faults
rain away from the controls. repaired and upgraded with the latest software.
2.4.10 Handles
The unit may be equipped with handles to facilitate
access to stacked containers. These fixed handles are
located on either side of the unit.

T-365 Rev B 2–2

T-365 Rev B
2.4.20 Condenser Grille
NOTICE Condenser grilles are direct bolted.

Repaired controllers are NOT to be used for 2.4.21 eAutoFresh

warranty repairs; only full OEM Remanufac- The optional eAutoFresh venting system moderates
tured controllers are to be used. the atmospheric level inside the container unit in
response to cargo respiration.
Controllers will be factory−equipped with the latest ver-
sion of operational software, but will NOT be config- 2.4.22 XtendFRESH
ured for a specific model number and will need to be Unit may be modified for XtendFRESH atmosphere
configured at the time of installation or sale. device. Refer to the T366 XtendFRESH manual for
more information.

2–3 T-365 Rev B

 SECTION 3
DESCRIPTION
3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 3.1.2 Fresh Air Makeup Vent
The function of the upper or lower makeup air vent is to
3.1.1 Refrigeration Unit − Front Section
provide ventilation for commodities that require fresh
The unit is designed so that the majority of the compo- air circulation. A manually operated venting system is
nents are accessible from the front (see Figure 3.1). located in the upper left access panel.
The unit model number, serial number and parts identi-
The optional eAutoFresh vent system is used to mod-
fication number can be found on the serial plate on the
erate the atmospheric level in the container in
back wall of the condenser section.
response to cargo respiration. When transporting fro-
zen cargo loads the vent will be closed. The upper left
access panel contains the vent slide and motor assem-
bly. It may be removed to allow entry into the evapora-
tor section where the CO2 sensor and drive pack are
located.

Figure 3.1 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section

2
15

* Unit may be modi- 5

fied for Xtend-
FRESH atmosphere
device. Refer to the
T366 XtendFRESH
manual for more in-
formation 6
14

13 7

12 11 10 9

1. Access Panel (Evap. Fan #1) 9. Supply Temperature Supply/Recorder Sen-

2. Fork Lift Pockets sor Assembly (STS/SRS)
3. Control Box 10. Economizer
4. Unit Display 11. Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)
5. Key Pad 12. Power Cables and Plug (Location)
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 13. Autotransformer
7. Start−Stop Switch, ST 14. Condenser Grille
8. Compressor 15. Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent Panel (Evap.
Fan #2)
-----

3–1 T-365 Rev B

3.1.3 Evaporator Section If the unit is provisioned for XtendFRESH or equipped
The evaporator section is shown below. The evapora- with eAutoFresh, system components are mounted in
tor fans circulate air through the container by pulling it addition to the standard refrigeration unit components.
in the top of the unit, directing it through the evaporator The stepper motor component is installed in the vent;
coil where it is heated or cooled, and discharging it at the air filter, CO2 sensor, stepper motor drive and CO2
the bottom. sensing lines are installed on the rib of the upper grill.
Most evaporator components are accessible by remov-
ing the upper rear panel (as shown in the illustration) or
by removing the evaporator fan access panels (see
Figure 3.2).

Figure 3.2 Evaporator Section

8
6 4
3
2
1

13

12

11 5

10

1. Evaporator Fan Motor #1 (EM1) 8. Evaporator Temperature Sensors (Location)

2. Return Recorder Sensor/Temperature Sensor (ETS1 & ETS2)
(RRS/RTS) 9. Interrogator Connector (Rear) (ICR)
3. Humidity Sensor (HS) 10. USDA Probe Receptacle PR2
4. Evaporator Fan Motor #2 (EM2) 11. USDA Probe Receptacle PR1
5. Evaporator Coil Heaters (Underside of Coil) 12. USDA Probe Receptacle PR3
6. Evaporator Coil 13. Cargo Probe Receptacle PR4
7. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)
-----

T-365 Rev B 3–2

3.1.4 Compressor Section ducer (DPT), evaporator pressure transducer (EPT)
The compressor section includes the compressor, digi- and the suction pressure transducer (SPT).
tal loader valve (DLV), digital unloader valve (DUV), The supply temperature sensor and supply recorder
high pressure switch (HPS), discharge pressure trans- sensor are located to the left of the compressor.

Figure 3.3 Compressor Section

10
18 11
12

13 17

14 9

15
3
2 4
5

16
1

1. Compressor 10. Digital Loader Valve (DLV)

2. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 11. Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)
(CPDS) (Location) 12. Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EPT)
3. Discharge Connection 13. High Pressure Switch (HPS)
4. Suction Connection (Location) 14. Discharge Service Valve
5. Compressor Terminal Box 15. Suction Service Valve
6. Oil Drain (Location) 16. Supply Temperature/Supply Recorder Sen-
7. Economizer Connection sor Assembly (STS/SRS)
8. Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) 17. Warning Label
9. DUV/DLV Connection 18. Digital Unloader Valve (DUV)
-----

3–3 T-365 Rev B

3.1.5 Air−Cooled Condenser Section expansion valve, economizer solenoid valve (ESV),
The air−cooled condenser section consists of the con- and sight glass/moisture indicator.
denser fan, condenser coil, receiver, liquid line service The condenser fan pulls air from around the coil and
valve, filter drier, fusible plug, economizer, economizer discharges it horizontally through the condenser fan
grille.

Figure 3.4 Air-Cooled Condenser Section

6 7 8

9
5
4

10

11

12

Two
locations
14

13

1. Grille and Venturi Assembly 8. Filter Drier

2. Condenser Fan 9. Economizer
3. Condenser Coil Cover 10. Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
4. Condenser Coil 11. Economizer Expansion Valve
5. Condenser Fan Motor 12. Warning Label (location)
6. Receiver 13. Service Access Valve
7. Sight Glass 14. Liquid Level/Moisture Indicator
-----

T-365 Rev B 3–4

3.1.6 Control Box Section 3.1.7 Communications Interface Module
The control box (Figure 3.5) includes: the manual The communications interface module is a slave mod-
operation switches, circuit breaker (CB−1), compres- ule which allows communication between the refrigera-
sor, fan and heater contactors, control power trans- tion unit and a ship system master central monitoring
former, fuses, key pad, display module, current sensor station. The module will respond to communication and
module, controller module and the communications return information over the ships main power line.
interface module. Refer to the master system technical manual for further
information.

Figure 3.5 Control Box Section

1 2 3 4

16

15

14

13 12 11 10 9 8

1. Compressor Contactor − CH 9. Control Transformer

2. Compressor Phase A Contactor − PA 10. High Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor − EF
3. Compressor Phase B Contactor − PB 11. Low Speed Evaporator Fan Contactor − ES
4. Heater Contactor − HR 12. Condenser Fan Contactor − CF
5. Controller/DataCORDER Module (Controller) 13. Circuit Breaker − 460V
6. Remote Monitoring Receptacle 14. Current Sensor Module
7. Start−Stop Switch, ST 15. Condenser Fan Low Speed − LC
8. Controller Battery Pack (Standard Location) 16. Condenser Fan (High Speed Shorting) − FS
-----

3–5 T-365 Rev B

3.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA

TABLE 3–1 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA

Model Number ZMD26K2E−TFD−274

Weight (With Oil) 42.9 kg (95 lb)

Compressor/Motor Assembly
Approved Oil Uniqema Emkarate RL−32−3MAF

Oil Charge 1774 ml (60 ounces)

Verify at −18°C (0°F)

Electronic Expansion Valve
container box tem- 4.4 to 6.7°C (8 to 12°F)
Superheat (Evaporator)
perature

Verify at −18°C (0°F)

High Pressure Expansion Valve
container box tem- 4.4 to 11.1°C (8 to 20°F)
(HPXV)
perature

Heater Termination Thermostat Opens 54° (+/− 3) C = 130° (+/− 5) F

(HTT) Closes 38° (+/− 4) C = 100° (+/− 7) F

Cut−Out (+/− 1.0) kg/cm2 = 350 (+/− 10) psig

High Pressure Switch (HPS)
Cut−In (+/− 0.7) kg/cm2 = 250 (+/− 10) psig

! WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD: Failure to follow this WARNING can result in death, serious personal
injury and / or property damage.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating the product.
Charge Only With R−134a: Refrigerant must conform to AHRI Standard 700 specification.

Conforming to AHRI standard 700 specifica-

Refrigerant R-134a
tions.

! CAUTION
Charge water−cooled condenser or receiver according to nameplate specifications to ensure
optimal unit performance.

Refrigerant Charge Receiver 4.54kg (10 lbs)

Melting Point 99°C = (210°F)

Fusible Plug
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft−lbs)
Bursts at 35 +/− 5% kg/cm2 = (500 +/− 5% psig)
Rupture Disc
Torque 6.2 to 6.9 mkg (45 to 50 ft−lbs)

Unit Weight Refer to unit model number plate.

Cut-In 0.5 +/− 0.2 kg/cm2 (7 +/− 3 psig)

Water Pressure Switch
Cutout 1.6 +/− 0.4 kg/cm2 (22 +/− 5 psig)

T-365 Rev B 3–6

3.3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DATA

CB−1 (25 amp) Trips at 29 amps

Circuit Breaker CB−2 (50 amp) Trips at 62.5 amps

CB−3 (70 amp) Trips at 87.5 amps

Compressor Motor Full Load Amps (FLA) 13 amps @ 460 VAC

380 VAC/3 PH/50 Hz 460 VAC/3 PH/60 Hz

Full Load Amps, High

0.73 0.80
Speed

Full Load Amps, Low

.42 .44
Speed
Condenser Fan Motor RPM, High Speed 1425 rpm 1725 rpm

RPM, Low Speed 720 rpm 850 rpm

Voltage and Frequency 360 − 460 VAC +/-2.5Hz 400 − 506 VAC +/-2.5Hz

Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required.

Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end.

Number of Heaters 6

Rating 750 watts +5/-10% each @ 230 VAC

Evaporator Coil Heaters
Resistance (cold) 6.8 to 77.2 ohms @ 20°C (68°F)

Type Sheath

380 VAC/3 PH/50 Hz 460 VAC/3 PH/60 Hz

Full Load Amps

1.07 0.9
High Speed

Full Load Amps

0.47 0.47
Low Speed

Rotations Per Minute

2850 rpm 3450 rpm
Evaporator Fan Motors High Speed
Rotations Per Minute
1425 rpm 1725 rpm
Low Speed

Voltage and Frequency 360 − 460 VAC +/− 400 − 500 VAC +/−
1.25Hz 1.5Hz

Bearing Lubrication Factory lubricated, additional grease not required

Rotation CW when viewed from shaft end

Control Circuit 7.5 amps (F3A,F3B)

Fuses Controller/DataCORDER 5 amps (F1 & F2)

Emergency Bypass 10 amps (FEB)

Electrical Output 0.5 VDC to 4.5 VDC over 90 degree range

Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Supply Voltage 5 VDC +/− 10%

Supply Current 5 mA (typical)

3–7 T-365 Rev B

 Nominal Resistance @
Solenoid Valve Coils (ESV/ 77°F (25°C) 7.7 ohms +/− 5%
USV) 24 VAC
Maximum Current Draw 0.7 amps

DLV Coil 12 VDC Nominal Resistance @

14.8 ohms +/− 5%
68°F (20°C)

DUV Coil 24VAC Nominal Resistance @

15.5 ohms +/− 5%
68°F (20°C)

Coil Feed to Ground (Gray

47 ohms
EEV Nominal Resistance Wire)

Coil Feed to Coil Feed 95 ohms

Orange wire Power

Red wire Output

Brown wire Ground

Input voltage 5 VDC

Output voltage 0 to 3.3 VDC

Humidity Sensor
Output voltage readings verses relative humidity (RH) percentage:

30% 0.99 V

50% 1.65 V

70% 2.31 V

90% 2.97 V

3.4 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES Open safety switch contacts on either or both of
devices IP−CP or HPS will shut down the compressor.
Unit components are protected from damage by safety
and protective devices listed in Table 3–1. These Open safety switch contacts on device IP−CM will shut
devices monitor the unit operating conditions and open down the condenser fan motor.
a set of electrical contacts when an unsafe condition The entire refrigeration unit will shut down if one of the
occurs. following safety devices open: (a) circuit breaker(s); (b)
fuse (F3A/F3B, 7.5A); or (c) evaporator fan motor inter-
nal protector(s) − (IP).

Table 3–2 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES

UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING

Circuit Breaker (CB−1, 25 amp) −

Trips at 29 amps (460 VAC)
Manual Reset

Circuit Breaker (CB−2, 50 amp) −

Excessive current draw Trips at 62.5 amps (230 VAC)
Manual Reset

Circuit Breaker (CB−2, 70 amp) −

Trips at 87.5 amps (230 VAC)
Manual Reset

Excessive current draw in the control

Fuse (F3A & F3B) 7.5 amp rating
circuit

Excessive current draw by the con-

Fuse (F1 & F2) 5 amp rating
troller Fuse

T-365 Rev B 3–8

Table 3–2 SAFETY AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES

UNSAFE CONDITION DEVICE DEVICE SETTING

Excessive current draw by the Emer-

Fuse (FEB) 10 amp rating
gency Bypass module

Excessive condenser fan motor Internal Protector (IP−CM) − Auto-

N/A
winding temperature matic Reset

Excessive compressor motor wind- Internal Protector (IP−CP) − Auto-

N/A
ing temperature matic Reset

Excessive evaporator fan motor(s) Internal Protector(s) (IP−EM) − Au-

N/A
winding temperature tomatic Reset

Fusible Plug − Used on the Receiver 99°C = (210°F)

Abnormal pressures/temperatures
in the high refrigerant side Rupture Disc − Used on the Wa-
35 kg/cm2 = (500 psig)
ter−Cooled Condenser
Abnormally high discharge pressure High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens at 25 kg/cm2 (350 psig)

3.5 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT capacity is when the DLV is open 0% of the time and
the DUV 100% of the time. If the system capacity has
3.5.1 Standard Operation been decreased to the lowest allowable capacity, the
Starting at the compressor, (see Figure 3.6, upper unit will enter a trim heat mode of operation, during
schematic) the suction gas is compressed to a higher which the controller will pulse the evaporator heaters in
pressure and temperature. sequence with the compressor digital signal in order to
absorb the excess capacity.
The refrigerant gas flows through the discharge line
and continues into the air−cooled condenser. When 3.5.2 Economized Operation
operating with the air−cooled condenser active, air
flowing across the coil fins and tubes cools the gas to In the economized mode, (see Figure 3.7) the frozen
saturation temperature. By removing latent heat, the and pull down capacity of the unit is increased by sub−
gas condenses to a high pressure/high temperature liq- cooling the liquid refrigerant entering the electronic
uid and flows to the receiver, which stores the addi- expansion valve. Overall efficiency is increased
tional charge necessary for low temperature operation. because the gas leaving the economizer enters the
compressor at a higher pressure, therefore requiring
The liquid refrigerant continues through the liquid line, less energy to compress it to the required condensing
the filter drier (which keeps refrigerant clean and dry) conditions.
and the economizer (not active during standard opera-
tion) to the electronic expansion valve (EEV). Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is
taken from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter
As the liquid refrigerant passes through the variable drier. The flow is activated when the controller ener-
orifice of the EEV, the pressure drops to suction pres- gizes the economizer solenoid valve (ESV).
sure. In this process some of the liquid vaporizes to a
gas (flash gas), removing heat from the remaining liq- The liquid refrigerant flows through the ESV to the
uid. The liquid exits as a low pressure, low tempera- economizer expansion valve internal passages,
ture, saturated mix. Heat is then absorbed from the absorbing heat from the liquid refrigerant flowing to the
return air by the balance of the liquid, causing it to electronic expansion valve. The resultant “medium”
vaporize in the evaporator coil. The vapor then flows temperature/pressure gas enters the compressor at the
through the suction tube back to the compressor. economizer port fitting.
During the standard mode of operation, the normally 3.5.3 Economizer Expansion Valve
closed valves, digital loader valve (DLV) and digital
The microprocessor controls the superheat leaving the
unloader valve (DUV), control the system refrigerant
economizer expansion valve (EXV). From the EXV the
flow and capacity by loading and unloading the com-
refrigerant flows through the internal passages of the
pressor in frequent discrete time intervals. The DLV
economizer heat exchanger, absorbing heat from the
and DUV operate in opposition to each other such that
refrigerant flowing to the EEV. The resultant “medium”
when the DLV is closed the DUV is open and vice
temperature/pressure gas enters the compressor at the
versa. The valves cycle on a fixed duty cycle so that
economizer port fitting.
maximum capacity occurs when the DLV is open 100%
of the time and the DUV is open 0% and minimum

3–9 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 3.6 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Standard Operation

STANDARD OPERATION

COMBO
ETS1 AND 2
EVAPORATOR

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION
VALVE

SIGHT
GLASS

CONDENSER
FILTER
DRIER

DISCHARGE
SERVICE
VALVE

LIQUID LEVEL/
MOISTURE DISCHARGE
INDICATOR LIQUID LINE TEMPERATURE
RECEIVER SERVICE VALVE SENSOR

DIGITAL
DIGITAL UNLOADER
VALVE
ECON. TXV LOADER
ECONOMIZER SENSING BULB VALVE
SOLENOID
VALVE

DISCHARGE
PRESSURE
ECONOMIZER TRANSDUCER
TXV

ECONOMIZER EVAPORATOR PRESSURE

TRANSDUCER

SUCTION PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER

SUCTION
SERVICE
VALVE
COMPRESSOR

T-365 Rev B 3–10

 Figure 3.7 Refrigeration Circuit Schematic − Economized Operation

ECONOMIZED OPERATION
COMBO ETS1
AND ETS2
EVAPORATOR

ELECTRONIC
EXPANSION
VALVE

SIGHT
GLASS

CONDENSER
FILTER
DRIER

DISCHARGE
SERVICE
LIQUID LEVEL/ VALVE
MOISTURE LIQUID LINE
INDICATOR SERVICE VALVE DISCHARGE
RECEIVER TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

DIGITAL
DIGITAL UNLOADER
ECON. TXV LOADER VALVE
SENSING BULB VALVE
ECONOMIZER
SOLENOID
VALVE

DISCHARGE
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
ECONOMIZER
TXV

EVAPORATOR PRESSURE
ECONOMIZER TRANSDUCER

SUCTION PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER

SUCTION
SERVICE
COMPRESSOR
VALVE

3–11 T-365 Rev B

 SECTION 4
MICROPROCESSOR
4.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROL MICROPROCES- The DataCORDER software functions to record unit
SOR SYSTEM operating parameters and cargo temperature parame-
ters for future retrieval. Coverage of the temperature
The temperature control Micro−Link 3 microprocessor
control software begins with Section 4.2. Coverage of
system (see Figure 4.1) consists of a keypad, display
the DataCORDER software is provided in Section 4.8.
module, the control module (controller) and intercon-
necting wiring. The controller houses the temperature The keypad and display module serve to provide user
control software and the DataCORDER software. The access and readouts for both of the controller func-
temperature control software functions to operate the tions, temperature control and DataCORDER. The
unit components as required to provide the desired functions are accessed by keypad selections and
cargo temperature and humidity. viewed on the display module. The components are
designed to permit ease of installation and removal

Figure 4.1 Temperature Control System

COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN

EN12830
CONTROLLER With
(7.5A)

(7.5A)

KB
OC1
(5A)

(5A)

F3A

F3B

KA
MC
MA

MB

CARRIER
KH
TP
F2

F1

Micro-Link3 DataCORDER S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW:

T B C1 KD
1035 12-00579-00
KC 59980
KE

CONTROL MODULE SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

DISPLAY MODULE

CODE PRE
SELECT TRIP

MANUAL
ALARM
DEFROST/
LIST
INTERVAL

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SOFTWARE

ENTER

RETURN C
SUPPLY F

KEY PAD
BATTERY
POWER
ALT
MODE

CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS PRE-TRIP

SOFTWARE SOFTWARE (AL<70)
INTERROGATION
CONNECTOR

CONFIGURATION FUNCTION TO
VARIABLE DISPLAY
CODE (Cd)
(CnF##)
TRANSICOLD
OFF
Esc

DataReader
ENTER

ON

DATAREADER
DataCORDER SOFTWARE

DATA Computer Device

CONFIGURATION OPERATIONAL ALARMS STORAGE
SOFTWARE SOFTWARE (AL>68) With DataLINE
MEMORY Software

OP/CONFIG.
COPYRIGHT 2003 CARRIER TRANSICOLD
WED8P002SRA0401C15 53819

12-00594-09
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

CTD Paret No:

MADE IN USA 0425

ML3 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

UTEC PART #: CEPL130582-61

PCMCIA CARD
SOFTWARE: RECP 51XX SCROLL 5317
CONFIGURATION: CFO5142 ML3
Serial# 000882 Date Code 0437
CAUTION: INSTALLING A DIFFERENT SERIES OF SOFTWARE (e.g. 53xx

CONFIGURATION TO
SERIES OVER 51XX SERIES) WILL RESET CONFIGURATION. CHECK SOFTWARE
VERSION (Cd18) BEFORE PROGRAMMING CONTROLLER. THIS SIDE FACING

FUNCTION TO
CONDENSER FAN. TUEN OFF POWER BEFORE INSERTION OR REMOVAL.

VARIABLE DISPLAY DISPLAY DATABANK

COPYRIGHT 2003 CARRIER TRANSICOLD
WED8P002SRA0401C15 53819

CODE (dC) 12-00594-09

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

CTD Paret No:

MADE IN USA 0425

ML3 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION

(dCF## read only) (Scrollback)

UTEC PART #: CEPL130582-61
SOFTWARE: RECP 51XX SCROLL 5317
CONFIGURATION:
Serial# 000882
CFO5142 ML3
Date Code 0437
CAUTION: INSTALLING A DIFFERENT SERIES OF SOFTWARE (e.g. 53xx
SERIES OVER 51XX SERIES) WILL RESET CONFIGURATION. CHECK SOFTWARE
VERSION (Cd18) BEFORE PROGRAMMING CONTROLLER. THIS SIDE FACING
CONDENSER FAN. TUEN OFF POWER BEFORE INSERTION OR REMOVAL.
PCMCIA CARD

4–1 T-365 Rev B

4.1.1 Key Pad
The key pad (Figure 4.2) is mounted on the of the con- Table 4–1 Key Pad Function
trol box door. The key pad consists of eleven push but- KEY FUNCTION
ton switches that act as the user’s interface with the
controller. Descriptions of the key pad switch functions Code Select Accesses function codes.
are provided in Table 4–1.
Pre-Trip Displays Pre-trip selection menu.
Figure 4.2 Key Pad Discontinues Pre-trip in prog-
ress.

Alarm List Displays alarm list and clears the

alarm queue.
CODE PRE
Manual Defrost / Displays selected defrost mode.
SELECT TRIP
Interval Depressing and holding the De-
frost Interval key for five (5) sec-
onds will initiate defrost using the
MANUAL
ALARM same logic as if the optional man-
DEFROST/
LIST ual defrost switch was toggled
INTERVAL
on.

Enter Confirms a selection or saves a

selection to the controller.
Arrow Up Change or scroll a selection up-
ward. Pre-trip advance or test in-
terruption.
ENTER
Arrow Down Change or scroll a selection
downward. Pre-trip repeat back-
ward.

Return / Supply Displays non-controlling probe

temperature (momentary dis-
play)

Celsius / Fahren- Displays alternate English/Metric

heit scale (momentary display).
When set to F, pressure is dis-
RETURN C played in psig and vacuum in “/
SUPPLY F hg.” “P” appears after the value
to indicate psig and “i” appears
for inches of mercury.
BATTERY ALT When set to C, pressure read-
POWER MODE ings are in bars. “b” appears after
the value to indicate bars.

Battery Power Initiate battery backup mode to

allow set point & function code
selection if AC power is not con-
nected.

ALT Mode This key is pressed to switch the

functions from the temperature
software to the DataCORDER
Software. The remaining keys
function the same as described
above except the readings or
changes are made to the Data-
CORDER programming.

T-365 Rev B 4–2

4.1.2 Display Module Figure 4.3 Display Module
The display module (Figure 4.3) consists of two five
digit displays and seven indicator lights. The indicator
lights include:
COOL HEAT DEFROST IN RANGE ALARM SUPPLY RETURN
• COOL − White or Blue LED: Energized when the
refrigerant compressor is energized.
• HEAT − Orange LED: Energized to indicate
heater operation in heat mode, defrost mode, or
dehumidification. SETPOINT/Code AIR TEMPERATURE/Data

• DEFROST − Orange LED: Energized when the

unit is in defrost mode.
4.1.3 Controller
• IN RANGE − Green LED: Energized when the
controlled temperature probe is within specified
tolerance of set point. ! CAUTION
Do not remove wire harnesses from con-
NOTICE troller modules unless you are grounded
to the unit frame with a static safe wrist
The controlling probe in perishable range strap.
will be the SUPPLY air probe and the con-
trolling probe in frozen range will be the
RETURN air probe. ! CAUTION
• ALARM − Red LED: Energized when there is an Unplug all controller module wire har-
active or an inactive shutdown alarm in the ness connectors before performing arc
alarm queue. welding on any part of the container.
• SUPPLY − Yellow LED: Energized when the
supply air probe is used for control. When this
LED is illuminated, the temperature displayed in ! CAUTION
the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading
at the supply air probe. This LED will flash if Do not attempt to use an ML2i PC card in
dehumidification is enabled. an ML3 equipped unit. The PC cards are
physically different and will result in
• RETURN − Yellow LED: Energized when the damage to the controller.
return air probe is used for control. When this
LED is illuminated, the temperature displayed in
the AIR TEMPERATURE display is the reading
at the return air probe. This LED will flash if
NOTICE
dehumidification is enabled. Do not attempt to service the controller
modules. Breaking the seal will void the
warranty.

The Micro-Link 3 controller is a dual module micropro-

cessor as shown in Figure 4.4. It is fitted with test
points, harness connectors and a software card pro-
gramming port.

4–3 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 4.4 Control Module

1 2 3 3 4 5 3 6 7 3 8 3

EN12830
CONTROLLER With

(7.5A)

(7.5A)

KB
OC1
(5A)

(5A)

F3A

F3B

KA
MC
MA

MB
CARRIER

KH
TP
F2

F1
Micro-Link3 DataCORDER S/N: 0491162 REV 5147 YYWW:
T B C1 KD
1035 12-00579-00
KC 59980
KE

1. Mounting Screw 5. Fuses

2. Micro−Link 3 Control/DataCORDER Module 6. Control Circuit Power Connection
3. Connectors 7. Software Programming Port
4. Test Points 8. Battery Pack (Standard Location)
-----

4.2 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

The controller software is a custom designed program equipment fitted and options listed on the original pur-
that is subdivided into configuration software and oper- chase order. Changes to the configuration software are
ational software. The controller software performs the required only when a new controller has been installed
following functions: or a physical change has been made to the unit such
• Control supply or return air temperature to as the addition or removal of an option. A configuration
required limits, provide modulated refrigeration variable list is provided in Table 4–4. Change to the
operation, economized operation, unloaded factory-installed configuration software is achieved via
operation, electric heat control and defrost. a configuration card or by communications.
Defrost is performed to clear buildup of frost and
4.2.2 Operational Software (Cd Function
ice in order to ensure proper air flow across the
Codes)
evaporator coil.
The operational software is the actual operation pro-
• Provide default independent readouts of set gramming of the controller which activates or deacti-
point and supply or return air temperatures. vates components in accordance with current unit
• Provide ability to read and (if applicable) modify operating conditions and operator selected modes of
the configuration software variables, operating operation.
software Function Codes and Alarm Code indi- The programming is divided into function codes. Some
cations. of the codes are read only while the remaining codes
• Provide a Pre-trip step-by-step checkout of may be user configured. The value of the user configu-
refrigeration unit performance including: proper rable codes can be assigned in accordance with user
component operation, electronic and refrigera- desired mode of operation. A list of the function codes
tion control operation, heater operation, probe is provided in Table 4–5.
calibration, pressure limiting and current limiting To access the function codes, perform the following:
settings.
1. Press the CODE SELECT key, then press an
• Provide battery−powered ability to access or arrow key until the left window displays the
change selected codes and set point without AC desired code number.
power connected.
2. The right window will display the selected func-
• Provide the ability to reprogram the software tion code value for five seconds before returning
through the use of a memory card. to normal display mode.
4.2.1 Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 3. If additional time is required, pressing the
Configuration software is a variable listing of the com- ENTER key will extend the display time to 30
ponents available for use by the operational software. seconds.
This software is factory installed in accordance with the

T-365 Rev B 4–4

4.3 CONTROLLER SEQUENCE AND MODES OF When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -
OPERATION 10°C, perishable mode is active with set points above -
10°C (+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, perishable
General operation sequences for cooling, heating and
mode is active with set points above -5°C (+23°F).
defrost are provided in the following sub-paragraphs.
Schematic representation of controller operation is pro- 4.3.4 Perishable Steady State
vided in Figure 4.5 and Figure 4.8.
Perishable Steady State is used to maintain he control
Operational software responds to various inputs.
temperature near a set point that is above the heat
These inputs come from the temperature sensors and
lockout temperature.
pressure transducers, the temperature set point, the
settings of the configuration variables and the function On a properly loaded box, the unit will operate in
code assignments. The action taken by the operational steady state mode. This results in unloaded operation
software changes as the input values change. Overall by cycling the DLV and DUV to limit capacity and main-
interaction of the inputs is described as a “mode” of tain steady temperature control.
operation. The modes of operation include perishable The unit is capable of maintaining supply to within +/
(chill) mode and frozen mode. Descriptions of the con- −0.2°C (+/−0.36°F) of set point. Supply air temperature
troller interaction and modes of operation are provided is controlled by positioning of the EEV, cycling of DLV
in the following sub paragraphs. and DUV, cycling of the compressor, and cycling of the
heaters.
4.3.1 Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence
At start up, the controller logic checks for proper phase 4.3.5 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation
sequencing and compressor rotation. If incorrect Perishable Idle Mode is used when it is unnecessary to
sequencing is causing the compressor and three- run the compressor to maintain control temperature. If
phase evaporator and condenser fan motors to rotate temperature drops to 0.2°C (0.36°F) above set point,
in the wrong direction, the controller will energize or de- the controller determines that cooling is not required or
energize relay TCP as required (see Figure 8.2). Relay the controller logic determines suction pressure is at
TCP will switch its contacts, energizing or de-energiz- the low pressure limit, the unit will transition to Perish-
ing relays PA and PB. Relay PA is wired to energize able Idle Mode. During Perishable Idle Mode, the com-
the circuits on L1, L2 and L3. Relay PB is wired to pressor is turned off, but the evaporator fans continue
energize the circuits on L3, L2, and L1, thus providing to run to circulate air throughout the container. If tem-
reverse rotation. perature rises +0.2°C (+0.36°F) above set point, the
unit will transition back to perishable steady state.
4.3.2 Start up - Compressor Bump Start
At start up, the controller logic will initiate a compressor 4.3.6 Perishable Heating
bump start procedure to clear liquid refrigerant from the When it is necessary to raise the control temperature,
compressor. If suction and discharge pressures have the system will enter Perishable Heating Mode. If the
equalized, the compressor will perform three compres- temperature drops to 0.5°C (0.9°F) below set point, the
sor bump starts. A compressor bump start may also unit will transition to Perishable Heating Mode, and the
occur after a defrost cycle has been completed. heaters will be energized. The unit will transition back
During Bump Start, the EEV will close. Relays TS, TG, to Perishable Idle Mode when the temperature rises to
TN, TE, and TV will be de-energized (opened). The 0.2°C (0.36°F) below the set point, and the heaters will
result of this action will close the ESV and shut all fans de-energize.
off. The compressor will start for 1 second, then pause
4.3.7 Perishable Pulldown
for five seconds. This sequence will be repeated two
more times. After the final bump start the unit will pre- When the system is in Perishable Pulldown Mode, the
position the EEV to the correct starting position, pause highest priority is given to bringing the container down
and start up. to set point. When cooling from a temperature that is
more than 2.5°C (4.5°F) above set point, the system
4.3.3 Perishable Mode Temperature Control will be in perishable pulldown mode in economized
In Perishable Mode, the controller maintains the supply operation.
air temperature at set point, the SUPPLY indicator light However, pressure and current limit functions may
is illuminated and the default reading on the display restrict the valves if either exceeds the preset value.
window is the supply temperature sensor reading. Once set point is reached, the unit will transition to per-
When the supply air temperature enters the in-range ishable steady state mode. This results in unloaded
temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE operation by cycling the DLV and DUV to limit capacity
light will energize. and maintain steady temperature control.

4–5 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 4.5 Controller Operation - Perishable Mode

Perishable Mode Pull Down

(Only Applicable to Perishable Mode)
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
Controller Set Point ABOVE ï10qC (+14qF),
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally
orï5qC (+23qF) optionally

+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)
Cooling, Cooling,
Unloaded Economized
Set +.20qC
Point Set
Cooling, Point
ï.20qC Air Circulation ï.25qC Unloaded
ï.20qC ï.20qC
Air Circulation
ï.50qC
ï.50qC

Heating
Heating

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.8 Perishable Dehumidification If any condition except item (1) becomes false OR if the
Dehumidification is provided to reduce the humidity relative humidity sensed is 2% below the dehumidifica-
levels inside the container, the dehumidification set tion set point, the high speed evaporator fans will be
point range is from 50% to 95%. Dehumidification is energized.
activated when a humidity value is set at Cd33. During During dehumidification power is applied to the defrost
dehumidification operation the condenser fan speed is heaters. This added heat load causes the controller to
fixed in high speed. The yellow SUPPLY LED will flash open the EEV to match the increased heat load while
ON and OFF every second to indicate that dehumidifi- still holding the supply air temperature very close to the
cation is active. Once dehumidification is active and the set point.
following conditions are satisfied, the controller will Opening the EEV reduces the temperature of the evap-
activate the heat relay to begin dehumidification. orator coil surface, which increases the rate at which
• The humidity sensor reading is above the humid- water is condensed and removes water from the pass-
ity set point (Cd33). ing air. Removing water from the air reduces the rela-
tive humidity. When the relative humidity sensed is 2%
• The unit is in perishable steady state and supply below set point, the controller de-energizes the heat
air temperature is less than 0.25°C (0.45°F) relay. The controller will continue to cycle heating to
above set point. maintain relative humidity below the selected set point.
• The heater debounce timer (three minutes) has If dehumidification is terminated by a condition other
timed out. than the humidity sensor, e.g., an out-of-range or com-
pressor shutdown condition, the heat relay is de-ener-
• Heater termination thermostat (HTT) is closed. gized immediately.
If the above conditions are true for at least one hour the Two timers are activated during dehumidification to
evaporator fans will switch from high speed to low prevent rapid cycling and consequent contactor wear:
speed. Evaporator fan speed will then switch every • Heater debounce timer (three minutes) - The
hour, as long as the 4 conditions are met (see Bulb heater debounce timer is started whenever the
Mode, Section 4.3.9 for different evaporator fan speed heater contactor status is changed. The heat
options).

T-365 Rev B 4–6

 contactor remains energized (or de-energized) There is no active display that indicates that economy
for at least three minutes even if the set point cri- fan mode has been initiated. To check for economy fan
teria are satisfied. mode, perform a manual display of Cd34.
• Out-of-range timer (five minutes) - The out-of- In order to initiate economy fan mode, a perishable set
range timer is started to maintain heater opera- point must be selected prior to activation. When econ-
tion during a temporary out-of-range condition. If omy fan mode is active, the evaporator fans will be
supply air temperature remains outside of the controlled as follows:
user selected in-range setting for more than five At the start of each cooling or heating cycle, the evapo-
minutes, the heaters will be de-energized to rator fans will run in high speed for three minutes. They
allow the system to recover. The out-of-range will then be switched to low speed any time the supply
timer starts as soon as temperature exceeds in- air temperature is within +/- 0.2°C (0.36°F) of the set
range tolerance value set by Cd30. point and the return air temperature is less than or
equal to the supply air temperature +3°C (5.4°F). The
4.3.9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode fans will continue to run in low speed for one hour. At
Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidification which the end of the hour, the evaporator fans will switch
allows changes to the evaporator fan speed and/or back to high speed and the cycle will be repeated. If
defrost termination set points. bulb mode is active, economy fan mode will be overrid-
Bulb mode is active when Cd35 is set to “Bulb.” Once den.
bulb mode is activated, the user may then change
4.3.11 Perishable Mode Cooling − Sequence of
dehumidification evaporator fan operation from the
Operation
default (speed alternates from low to high each hour) to
constant low or constant high speed. This is done by
toggling Cd36 from its default of “alt” to “Lo” or “Hi” as
desired. If low speed evaporator fan operation is
NOTICE
selected, this gives the user the additional capability of In Standard Perishable Mode, the evapo-
selecting dehumidification set points from 50 to 95%. rator motors run in high speed. In Econ-
In addition, if bulb mode is active, Cd37 may be set to omy Fan Mode, the fan speed is varied.
override the previous defrost termination thermostat a. When supply air temperature is above set point
(DTT) settings. The temperature at which the DTT will and decreasing, the unit will cool with the con-
be considered “open” may be changed [in 0.1°C denser fan motor (CF and FS), compressor
(0.2°F) increments] to any value between 25.6°C motor (CH), evaporator fan motors (EF) ener-
(78°F) and 4°C (39.2°F). The temperature at which the gized, and the white COOL light illuminated.
DTT is considered closed for interval timer start or (See Figure 4.6).
demand defrost is 10°C (50°F) for “open” values from
25.6°C (78°F) down to a 10°C (50°F) setting. For Figure 4.6 Perishable Mode Cooling
“open” values lower than 10°C, the “closed” values will
decrease to the same value as the “open” setting. Bulb ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED
mode is terminated when:
ST
• Bulb mode code Cd35 is set to “Nor.” F 24 VOLT POWER

TC CH
• Dehumidification code Cd33 is set to “Off.” HPS

• The user changes the set point to one that is in TN IP-CM TG LC CF

the frozen range.
FS
When bulb mode is disabled by any of the above condi-
tions, evaporator fan operation for dehumidification TG CF FS LC
reverts to “alt” and the DTS termination setting resets
to the value determined by CnF41.
TV EF ES

4.3.10 Perishable Economy TE EF

IP-EM1 IP-EM2
Economy fan mode is an extension of the Perishable
HR
Mode, and is provided for power saving purposes. HTT TH

Economy fan mode is activated when Cd34 (also used ESV

TS
for Frozen Economy Mode) is set to “ON.” Economy
fan mode is used in the transportation of temperature-
tolerant cargo or non-respiration items which do not
require high airflow for removing respiration heat.

4–7 T-365 Rev B

 b. When supply air temperature decreases to a is also de-energized. The evaporator fans con-
predetermined tolerance above set point (Cd30), tinue to run to circulate air throughout the con-
the green IN RANGE light is illuminated. tainer.
c. Condenser fan speed will change dependent on c. The safety heater termination thermostat (HTT)
the following conditions: is attached to an evaporator coil circuit and will
Change high speed to low speed (LC): open the heating circuit if overheating occurs.
Compressor loading ratio falls below 38%
Figure 4.7 Perishable Mode Heating
Change low speed to high speed:
ENERGIZED
Compressor loading ratio above 45% DE-ENERGIZED

If compressor discharge pressure is above F

ST
24 VOLT POWER
200psig and condenser fan speed is high speed,
TC CH
then it will ratio. HPS

d. The controller continuously monitors supply air TN IP-CM TG LC CF

temperature. Once the supply air temperature

falls below set point, the controller periodically FS

records supply air temperature, set point and LC

TG CF FS
time. A calculation is then performed to deter-
mine temperature drift from set point over time. If
the calculation determines that cooling is no lon- TV EF ES

ger required, contacts TC and TN are opened to

TE EF
de-energize the compressor motor and the con- IP-EM1 IP-EM2

denser fan motor. In addition the controller will HTT TH HR

close the EEV.
TS ESV
e. The evaporator fan motors continue to run to cir-
culate air throughout the container. The green IN
RANGE light remains illuminated as long as the
supply air temperature is within tolerance of the
set point.

f. If the supply air temperature increases to 0.2°C

NOTICE
(0.36°F) above set point, contacts TC and TN The EEV and DUV are independently
close to restart the compressor and condenser operated by the microprocessor. For full
fan motors in standard steady state operation. diagrams and legend, see Section 8.
The white COOL light is also illuminated.
4.3.13 Perishable Mode - Trim Heat
g. If the supply air increases more than 2.5°C
If the system capacity has been decreased to the low-
(4.5°F) above set point temperature, contacts
est allowable capacity and conditions exist that warrant
TS will close to energize and open the ESV,
maximum temperature stability the controller will pulse
placing the unit in pull down mode.
the HR relay to energize the evaporator heaters in
4.3.12 Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of sequence with the compressor digital signal.
Operation
4.3.14 Frozen Mode - Temperature Control
a. If the supply air temperature decreases 0.5°C In Frozen Mode, the controller maintains the return air
(0.9°F) below set point, the system enters the temperature at set point, the yellow RETURN indicator
heating mode. (See Figure 4.5). The controller light is illuminated, and the default reading on the dis-
closes contacts TH (see Figure 4.7) to allow play window is the return temperature sensor (RTS)
power flow through the heat termination thermo- reading.
stat (HTT) to energize the heaters (HR). The
When the return air temperature enters the in-range
orange HEAT light is also illuminated. The evap-
temperature tolerance (Cd30), the green IN-RANGE
orator fans continue to run to circulate air
light will energize.
throughout the container.
When CnF26 (Heat Lockout Temperature) is set to -
b. When the supply air temperature rises to 0.2°C 10°C, frozen mode is active with set points below -
(0.36°F) below set point, contact TH opens to 10°C (+14°F). When CnF26 is set to -5°C, frozen mode
de-energize the heaters. The orange HEAT light is active with set points below -5°C (+23°F).

T-365 Rev B 4–8

When the system is in Frozen Mode, the highest prior- 4.3.16 Frozen Idle Mode
ity is given to bringing the container down to set point, When temperature drops to set point minus 0.2°C
the system will remain in economized operation. (0.4°F) and the compressor has run for at least five
minutes, the unit will transition to the frozen idle mode.
4.3.15 Frozen Steady State
The compressor is turned off and the evaporator fans
Frozen cargos are not sensitive to minor temperature continue to run to circulate air throughout the container.
changes, and the frozen temperature control system If temperature rises above set point +0.2°C, (0.4°F) the
takes advantage of this to greatly improve the energy unit will transition back to the frozen steady state
efficiency of the unit. Frozen range temperature control mode.
is accomplished by cycling the compressor on and off
as the load demand requires.

Figure 4.8 Controller Operation - Frozen Mode

Frozen Mode
Controller Set Point at or BELOW ï10qC (+14qF),
or ï5qC (+23qF) optionally
+2.5qC
(+4.5qF)

Cooling,
Economized

+.20qC
Set Point
ï.20qC

Air Circulation

Falling Rising
Temperature Temperature

4.3.17 Frozen “Heat” Mode excluding the controller, will be turned off when the
If the temperature drops 10°C (18°F) below set point, control temperature is less than or equal to the set
the unit will transition to the frozen “heating” mode. The point -2°C (4°F).
evaporator fans are brought to high speed, and the After an off-cycle period of 60 minutes, the unit will turn
heat from the fans is circulated through the container. on high speed evaporator fans for three minutes, and
The unit will transition back to frozen steady state when then check the control temperature. If the control tem-
the temperature rises back to the transition point. perature is greater than or equal to the frozen set point
+0.2°C (0.4°F), the unit will restart the refrigeration sys-
4.3.18 Frozen Economy Mode tem and continue to cool until the off-cycle temperature
In order to activate Frozen Economy Mode, a frozen criteria are met. If the control temperature is less than
set point temperature must be selected, and Cd34 the frozen set point +0.2°C (0.4°F) the unit will turn off
(Economy Mode) set to “ON.” When economy mode is the evaporator fans and restart another 60 minute off-
active, the system will perform normal frozen mode cycle.
operations except that the entire refrigeration system,

4–9 T-365 Rev B

4.3.19 Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Oper-
ation
NOTICE
a. When the return air temperature is above set
The EEV and DUV are independently
point and decreasing, the unit will transition to
operated by the microprocessor. Com-
economized cooling with the condenser fan
plete schematics and legends are located
motor (CF), compressor motor (CH), economizer
in Section 8.
solenoid valve (ESV), low speed evaporator fan
motors (ES) energized and the white COOL light 4.3.20 Defrost
illuminated. (See Figure 4.9).
Defrost is initiated to remove ice buildup from the evap-
b. When the return air temperature decreases to a orator coil which can obstruct air flow and reduce the
predetermined tolerance above set point, the cooling capacity of the unit. The defrost cycle may con-
green INRANGE light is illuminated. sist of up to three distinct operations depending upon
the reason for the defrost or model number configura-
c. When the return air temperature decreases to tion. The first is de-icing of the coil, the second is
0.2°C (0.4°F) below set point, contacts TC, TS defrost due to a probe check cycle and the third is a
and TN are opened to de-energize the compres- snap freeze process based on the unit model configu-
sor, economizer solenoid valve and condenser ration.
fan motor. The white COOL light is also de-ener-
Defrosting the coil consists of removing power to
gized. The EEV will close.
the cooling components (compressor, evaporator
d. The evaporator fan motors continue to run in low fans, and condenser fan), closing the EEV, and
speed to circulate air throughout the container. turning on the heaters, which are located below the
The green IN-RANGE light remains illuminated evaporator coil. During normal operation, de-icing
as long as the return air is within tolerance of set will continue until temperatures indicate that the ice
point. on the coil has been removed, proper air flow has
been restored, and the unit is ready to control tem-
e. If return air temperature drops to 10°C (18°F) or perature efficiently.
more below set point, the evaporator fans
If defrost was initiated by the probe check logic,
increase to high speed.
then the Probe Check is carried out after the com-
f. When the return air temperature increases to pletion of the defrost cycle. A Probe Check is initi-
0.2°C (0.4°F) above set point and three minutes ated only when there is an inaccuracy between the
have elapsed, the EEV opens and contacts TC, controller temperature sensors. For more informa-
TS and TN close to restart the compressor, open tion on Probe Check refer to Section 5.9.
the ESV and restart the condenser fan motor. Snap Freeze allows the system to cool for a period
The white COOL is illuminated. of time after de-icing, with the evaporator fans
turned off and is only carried out if configured by
Figure 4.9 Frozen Mode model number. Snap-Freeze allows for the removal
of latent de-icing heat from the evaporator coils, and
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED freezes any remaining moisture that might other-
ST wise be blown into the container.
F 24 VOLT POWER

HPS TC CH 4.3.21 Defrost Operation

Initiation of defrost is dependent on the state of the
TN IP-CM TG LC CF Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS). When then (DTS)
senses a temperature less than 10°C (50°F) the defrost
FS
options become active and the timer is engaged for the
LC
initiation of the defrost cycle. The defrost time accumu-
TG CF FS
lates when the compressor is running. In the perishable
mode this is the same as real time as the compressor
TV EF ES in general runs continuously. In frozen mode the actual
time necessary to count down to the next defrost will
TE EF
IP-EM1 IP-EM2
exceed the defrost interval depending on the compres-
HTT TH HR sor duty-cycle.
When the defrost mode is in the active state, defrost
TS ESV
can be initiated when any one of the following addi-
tional conditions become true:

T-365 Rev B 4–10

1. Manually: A manual defrost is initiated by press- throughout the container. A probe check com-
ing the MANUAL DEFROST/INTERVAL key for parison is carried out at the end of the eight min-
greater than 5 seconds. ute period if any sensor is found out of
calibration. At this time its alarm set is no longer
2. Timer: The Defrost Interval Timer reaches the used for control/reorder purposes.
user selectable Interval. The user-selected inter-
vals are (OFF), 3, 6, 9, 12, 24 hours, AUTO, or 4. Probe Check Logic: The logic determines that
PuLS; factory default is 3 hours. Refer to code a Probe Check is necessary based on tempera-
select CD27 (Table 4–4). ture values currently reported by the supply and
return probes.
a. Automatic defrost starts with an initial defrost
at three hours and then adjusts the interval to 5. Remote: An Initiate Defrost command is sent via
the next defrost based on the accumulation communications.
of ice on the evaporator coil. Following a
start-up or after termination of defrost, the 6. Delta T Logic: If the difference between return
time will not begin counting down until the and supply air temperature (Delta T) becomes
DTS reading falls below 10°C (50°F). If the too great indicating possible reduced airflow
reading of DTS rises above termination set- over the evaporator coil caused by ice buildup
ting any time during the timer count down, requiring a defrost.
the interval is reset and the countdown starts a. In Perishable Pull Down - Delta T increases
over. The Auto defrost time is reset to three to greater than 12°C, and 90 minutes of com-
hours start time after every PTI initiation or pressor run time have been recorded.
trip start interval.
b. In Perishable Steady State – A baseline
b. Fan Pulsing Logic is used to help prevent ice Delta T is recorded following the first defrost
formation in the drain gutter and drain cup cycle after steady state conditions are
and ice buildup in supply air channel by using reached, (the unit is cooling, and the evapo-
the evaporator fans to blow the warm air onto rator fans and heaters must remain in a sta-
these areas during unit defrost. When cooling ble state for a period of five minutes). Defrost
at lower setpoints, evaporator fan pulsing can will be initiated if Delta T increases to greater
be used during Defrost/De-ice when the than 4°C above the baseline, and 90 minutes
“PuLS” option is selected in the Defrost Inter- of compressor run time have been recorded.
val function select code. When enabled,
evaporator fan pulsing will occur based on c. In Frozen Mode - Defrost will be initiated if
the unit temperature setpoint and the Evapo- Delta T increases to greater than 16°C and
rator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting 90 minutes of compressor run time have
(Cd60). QUEST II also pulses the evaporator been recorded.
fans during Defrost/De-ice within a narrow
perishable setpoint range. The logic for each
evaporator fan pulsing feature is described NOTICE
below.
When defrost is initiated, the controller
c. After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the closes the EEV, opens contacts TC, TN
previously selected Interval is used until the and TE (or TV) to de-energize the com-
next defrost termination, the next time the pressor, condenser fan and evaporator
DTS contacts are OPEN, or the next time fans.
power to the control is interrupted. If the pre-
vious value or the new value is “OFF”, the
newly selected value will be used immedi- NOTICE
ately.
The controller then closes contacts TH to
3. Probe Check: If defrost is initiated due to Probe supply power to the heaters. The orange
Check immediately following the defrost cycle DEFROST light and heat light are illumi-
the evaporation fans are started and run for nated and the COOL light is also de-ener-
eight minutes to stabilize the temperature gized.

4–11 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 4.10 Defrost If CnF64 is configured in the operator will be allowed to
choose “PuLS” as a defrost interval option. For units
ENERGIZED
DE-ENERGIZED operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is
ST determined by the unit temperature setpoint and the
F 24 VOLT POWER
Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting (Cd60).
HPS TC CH
When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or less
than the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting,
TN IP-CM TG LC CF
the defrost interval is set to 6 hours. Otherwise, the
defrost interval is determined using the Automatic
FS
Defrost Interval Determination logic. In either case,
TG CF FS LC “PuLS” remains displayed in this function select code.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be
set to ’AUTO’ unless CnF49 (OEM Reset) is set to
TV EF ES
“Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic)
IP-EM1 IP-EM2 TE EF configuration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27
will be set to “PuLS”.
HTT TH HR
If defrost does not terminate correctly and temperature
TS ESV
reaches the set point of the Heat Termination Thermo-
stat (HTT) 54°C (130°F), the HTT will open to de-ener-
gize the heaters (AL59 & AL60). If the HTT does not
open and termination does not occur within two hours,
the controller will terminate defrost. AL60 will be acti-
The EEV and DUV are independently operated by the
vated to inform of a possible DTS failure.
microprocessor. Complete schematics and legends are
located in Section 8.
4.4 PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION
Defrost will terminate when the DTS reading rises
above one of two model number configurable options 4.4.1 Evaporator Fan Operation
selection, either an upper setting of 25.6°C (78°F)
Opening of an evaporator fan internal protector will
which is default or lower setting of 18°C (64°F).
shut down the unit.
When the DTS reading rises to the configured setting,
the de-icing operation is terminated. 4.4.2 Failure Action
Function code Cd29 may be operator set to select
4.3.22 Defrost Related Parameters
action the controller will take upon system failure. The
factory default is full system shutdown. Refer to Table
DTS Failure
4–5.
When the return air temperature falls to 7°C (45°F), the
controller ensures that the defrost temperature sensor 4.4.3 Generator Protection
(DTS) reading has dropped to 10°C or below. If it has
Function codes Cd31 (Stagger Start, Offset Time) and
not it indicates a failed DTS, a DTS failure alarm is trig-
Cd32 (Current Limit) may be operator set to control the
gered and the defrost mode is operated by the return
start up sequence of multiple units and operating cur-
temperature sensor (RTS). Defrost will terminate after
rent draw. The factory default allows on demand start-
1 hour.
ing (no delay) of units and normal current draw. Refer
If the DTS fails to reach is termination setting, the to Table 4–5.
defrost terminate after 2 hours of operation.
4.4.4 Compressor High Temperature Protection
Defrost Timer The controller continuously monitors compressor dis-
If CnF23 is configured to “SAv” (save), then the value charge pressure and temperature, and suction pres-
of the defrost interval timer will be saved at power sure. If discharge pressure or temperature rises above
down and restored at power up. This option prevents the allowed limit or suction pressure falls below the
short power interruptions from resetting an almost allowed limit, the compressor will be cycled off and on
expired defrost interval, and possibly delaying a every 3 minutes. Condenser and evaporator fans will
needed defrost cycle. If the save option is not selected continue to operate during the compressor off cycle.
the defrost timer will re-initiate and begin recounting. If high compressor dome temperature occurs, as mea-
If CnF11 is model number configured to OFF the oper- sured by the CPDS, the controller will allow additional
ator will be allowed to choose “OFF” as a defrost inter- refrigerant to be released into the system in order to
val option. provide cooling to the evaporator coil and compressor
dome. The controller is alerted to high compressor
dome temperatures via the CPDS when ambient tem-

T-365 Rev B 4–12

perature is greater than 43.3°C, return air temperature During CCPC pulldown the supply air temperature
is less than -17.5°C and the compressor discharge is lowered somewhat relative to the nominal set-
temperature is greater than 117.7°C. point. Evaporator fans are forced to operate at high
Dome temperature control logic will disengage when speed.
return air temperature and ambient temperature return Steady-state CCPC control maintains the same low-
to allowed limits or when the compressor turns off. ered supply air temperature that was used during
CCPC pulldown. The compressor cycles on and off
4.4.5 Compressor Low Pressure Protection according to return air high and low limits. Depending
If the suction pressure low limit is triggered, the DUV on the fan mode of operation selected, the evaporator
will energize to raise the suction pressure. fans may be programmed to run at low speed some or
all of the time according to the control logic.
4.4.6 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regu-
lation 4.6 CONTROLLER ALARMS
In perishable mode, system pressures may need to be Alarm display is an independent controller software
regulated at ambient temperatures of 20°C (68°F) and function. If an operating parameter is outside of
below. Once below this ambient temperature, the con- expected range or a component does not return the
denser fan may cycle on and off based on limits correct signals back to the controller, an alarm is gen-
imposed for discharge pressure. For extremely cold erated. A listing of the alarms is provided in Table 4–6.
ambient temperatures, -18°C (0°F), heater cycling may
The alarm philosophy balances the protection of the
occur within normal system operation based on dis-
refrigeration unit and that of the refrigerated cargo. The
charge pressure limits.
action taken when an error is detected always consid-
4.4.7 Condenser Fan Override ers the survival of the cargo. Rechecks are made to
confirm that an error actually exists.
When CnF17 (Discharge Temperature Sensor) is set
Some alarms requiring compressor shutdown have
to “In” and CnF48 (Condenser Fan Switch Override) is
time delays before and after to try to keep the compres-
set to “On”, the condenser fan switch override logic is
sor on line. An example is alarm code “LO,” (low main
activated. If condenser cooling water pressure is suffi-
voltage), when a voltage drop of over 25% occurs, an
cient to open the water pressure switch (de-energizing
indication is given on the display, but the unit will con-
the condenser fan) when water flow or pressure condi-
tinue to run.
tions are not maintaining discharge temperature, the
logic will energize the condenser fan as follows: When an Alarm Occurs:

1. If the DLV/DUV is cycling at less than 80% a. The red ALARM light will energize for critical
capacity when the controller calls for it to be alarm code numbers 17, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25,
100% open, the condenser fan is energized. 26, and 27.
When the DLV/DUV regains full capacity, the fan
b. If a detectable problem exists, its alarm code will
will de-energize.
be alternately displayed with the set point on the
2. If DPT reading is invalid or out of range (AL65), left display.
the condenser fan is energized and will remain
c. The user should scroll through the alarm list to
energized until system power is cycled.
determine what alarms exist or have existed.
3. If the system is running on condenser fan over- Alarms must be diagnosed and corrected before
ride and the high pressure switch opens, the the Alarm List can be cleared.
condenser fan is energized and will remain ener-
gized until the system power is cycled. To Display Alarm Codes:

1. While in the Default Display mode, press the

4.5 QUEST − CCPC
ALARM LIST key. This accesses the Alarm List
Compressor-Cycle Perishable Cooling (CCPC) is a Display Mode, which displays any alarms
method of temperature control used during steady- archived in the alarm queue.
state perishable cooling that cycles the compressor on
and off according to return air temperature. 2. The alarm queue stores up to 16 alarms in the
sequence in which they occurred. The user may
To be eligible for steady-state control the unit must first scroll through the list by depressing an ARROW
complete a setpoint pulldown phase and a CCPC pull- key.
down phase:
During setpoint pulldown supply air temperature is 3. The left display will show “AL##,” where ## is the
controlled according to the unit’s nominal supply air alarm number sequentially in the queue.
setpoint.

4–13 T-365 Rev B

 4. The right display will show the actual alarm 4.8 DATACORDER
code. “AA##” will display for an active alarm,
where “##” is the alarm code. Or “IA##” will dis- 4.8.1 Description
play for an inactive alarm, refer to Table 4–6. Carrier Transicold “DataCORDER” software is inte-
grated into the controller and serves to eliminate the
5. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the
temperature recorder and paper chart. DataCORDER
alarm list if any alarms are active.
functions may be accessed by keypad selections and
6. “CLEAr” is displayed if all alarms are inactive. viewed on the display module. The unit is also fitted
The alarm queue may then be cleared by press- with interrogation connections (see Figure 4.1) which
ing the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear and may be used with the Carrier Transicold DataReader to
“-----” will be displayed. download data. A personal computer with Carrier Tran-
sicold DataLINE software installed may also be used to
download data and configure settings:
NOTICE • Configuration Software
AL26 is active when all of the sensors are • Operational Software
not responding. Check the connector at
the back of the controller; if it is loose or • Data Storage Memory
unplugged, reconnect it, then run a • Real Time Clock (with internal battery backup)
Pre−trip test (P5) to clear AL26.
• Six Thermistor Inputs
4.7 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSTICS • Interrogation Connections
Pre-trip Diagnostics is an independent controller func- • Power Supply (battery pack)
tion that suspends normal refrigeration controller activi-
ties and provides preprogrammed test routines. The The DataCORDER performs the following functions:
test routine can be run in Auto Mode, which automati- a. Logs data at 15, 30, 60 or 120 minute intervals
cally performs a pre programmed sequence of tests, or and stores two years of data (based on one hour
Manual Mode, which allows the operator to select and interval).
run any of the individual tests.
b. Records and displays alarms on the display
module.
! CAUTION
c. Records results of Pre−trip testing.
Pre−trip diagnostics should not be per-
formed with critical temperature cargoes d. Records DataCORDER and temperature control
in the container. software generated data and events as follows:
• Container ID Change
• Software Upgrades
! CAUTION
• Alarm Activity
When PRE−TRIP key is pressed, econ-
omy, dehumidification and bulb mode will • Battery Low (battery pack)
be deactivated. At the completion of • Data Retrieval
Pre−trip activity, economy, dehumidifica-
tion and bulb mode must be reactivated. • Defrost Start and End

A Pre-trip test may be initiated by use of the keypad or • Dehumidification Start and End
via communication, but when initiated by communica- • Power Loss (with and without battery pack)
tion the controller will execute the entire battery of tests
(auto mode). • Power Up (with and without battery pack)
At the end of a Pre-trip test, the message “P,” “rSLts” • Remote Probe Temperatures in the Con-
(pretest results) will be displayed. Pressing ENTER will tainer (USDA Cold treatment and Cargo
allow the user to see the results for each of the sub- probe recording)
tests. The results will be displayed as “PASS” or “FAIL”
• Return Air Temperature
for each test run to completion.
A detailed description of the Pre-trip tests and test • Set Point Change
codes is provided in Table 4–7. Detailed operating • Supply Air Temperature
instructions are provided in Section 5.8.
• Real Time Clock Battery (Internal) Replace-
ment

T-365 Rev B 4–14

 • Real Time Clock Modification Standard Mode
• Trip Start In Standard Mode, the user may configure the Data-
CORDER to record data using one of seven standard
• ISO Trip Header (When entered via Interro- configurations.
gation program)
The seven standard configuration variables, with their
• Economy Mode Start and End descriptions, are listed in Table 4–3.
• “Auto 1/Auto 2/Auto 3” Pre−trip Start and End The inputs of the six thermistors (supply, return, USDA
#1, #2, #3 and cargo probe) and the humidity sensor
• Bulb Mode Start input will be generated by the DataCORDER. Figure
• Bulb Mode Changes 4.11

• Bulb Mode End

• USDA Trip Comment NOTICE
• Humidification Start and End The DataCORDER software uses the sup-
ply and return recorder sensors (SRS,
• USDA Probe Calibration RRS). The temperature control software
• Fresh Air Vent Position uses the supply and return temperature
sensors (STS, RTS).
4.8.2 DataCORDER Software
Generic Mode
The DataCORDER Software is subdivided into Opera-
tional Software, Configuration Software, and the Data Generic recording mode allows user selection of the
Memory. network data points to be recorded. The user may
select up to a total of eight data points for recording. A
Operational Software list of data points available for recording follows.
Changing the configuration to generic and selecting
The Operational Software reads and interprets inputs
which data points to record may be done using the Car-
for use by the Configuration Software. The inputs are
rier Transicold Data Retrieval Program.
labeled Function Codes. Controller functions (see
Table 4–8) which the operator may access to examine 1. Control mode
the current input data or stored data. To access these
codes, do the following: 2. Control temperature

1. Press the ALT. MODE and CODE SELECT keys. 3. Frequency

2. Press an arrow key until the left window displays 4. Humidity

the desired code number. The right window will
5. Phase A current
display the value of this item for five seconds
before returning to the normal display mode. 6. Phase B current
3. If a longer display time is desired, press the 7. Phase C current
ENTER key to extend the display time to five
minutes. 8. Main voltage

9. Evaporator expansion valve percentage

Configuration Software
The recording and alarm functions of the Data- [Link] outputs (Bit mapped − require special
CORDER based on the configurations. Reprogram- handling if used)
ming to the factory installed configuration is achieved
via a configuration card. Changes to the unit Data- 11. Discrete inputs (Bit mapped − require special
CORDER configuration may be made using the handling if used)
DataLINE interrogation software. [Link] temperature sensor (AMBS)
A listing of the configuration variables is provided in
Table 4–2. Descriptions of DataCORDER operation for [Link] temperature sensor (ETS)
each variable setting are provided in the following para- [Link] discharge sensor (CPDS)
graphs.
[Link] temperature sensor (RTS)
4.8.3 Sensor Configuration (dCF02)
[Link] temperature sensor (STS)
Two modes of operation may be configured, the Stan-
dard Mode and the Generic Mode. [Link] temperature sensor (DTS)

4–15 T-365 Rev B

 [Link] pressure transducer (DPT) 4.8.5 Thermistor Format (dCF04)
[Link] pressure transducer (SPT) The user may configure the format in which thermistor
readings are recorded. The short resolution is a 1 byte
[Link] tank pressure transducer (FPT) format and the long resolution is a 2 byte format. The
short requires less memory and records temperature
[Link] position sensor (VPS) with variable resolutions depending on temperature
----- range. The long records temperature in 0.01°C
(0.02°F) steps for the entire range.
4.8.4 Logging Interval (dCF03)
The user may select four different time intervals
between data recordings. Data is logged at exact inter-
vals in accordance with the real time clock. The clock is
factory set at Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Table 4–2 DataCORDER Configuration Variables

CONFIGURATION NO. TITLE DEFAULT OPTION

dCF01 (Future Use) -- --

dCF02 Sensor Configuration 2 2,5,6,9,54,64,94

dCF03 Logging Interval (Minutes) 60 15,30,60,120

dCF04 Thermistor Format Short Long

dCF05 Thermistor Sampling Type A A,b,C

dCF06 Controlled Atmosphere/Humidity Sampling Type A A,b

dCF07 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 1 A Auto, On, Off

dCF08 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 2 A Auto, On, Off

dCF09 Alarm Configuration USDA Sensor 3 A Auto, On, Off

dCF10 Alarm Configuration Cargo Sensor A A Auto, On, Off

T-365 Rev B 4–16

 Figure 4.11 Standard Configuration Download Report

Raw Data Report for ABC1234567

May 31, 2007 to Jun 04, 2007
System Configuration at the Time of Interrogation:
Interrogated On May 05, 2007
Extracted by DataLINE Rev 1.0.0

Controller Software: 5327

Controller Serial #: 04163552

Bill of Lading #: 1
Origin: Origin Date:
Destination: Discharge Date:
Comment: DataLINE Tool
Probe Calibration Readings: USDA1: 0.0 USDA2: 0.0 USDA3: 0.0 Cargo: 0.0
Temperature Units: Centigrade
________________________________________________________________________________________
May 31, 2007
Setpoint: 1.66, Container : Serial : 04189552
9 Sensors Logged at 15 Minute Interval
Sensor Format Resolution

4–17 T-365 Rev B

 4.8.8 DataCORDER Power Up
Table 4–3 DataCORDER Standard Configurations
The DataCORDER may be powered up in any one of
Standard Description four ways:
Config.
1. Normal AC power: The DataCORDER is pow-
2 sensors ered up when the unit is turned on via the Stop-
2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) Start switch.
(dCF02=2)

5 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) 2. Controller DC battery pack power: If a battery
(dCF02=5) 3 USDA thermistor inputs pack is installed, the DataCORDER will power
up for communication when an interrogation
6 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) cable is plugged into an interrogation receptacle.
(dCF02=6) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
1 humidity input 3. External DC battery pack power: A 12 volt bat-
tery pack may also be plugged into the back of
9 sensors the interrogation cable, which is then plugged
Not Applicable
(dCF02=9) into an interrogation port. No controller battery
pack is required with this method.
6 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
(dCF02=54) 3 USDA thermistor inputs 4. Real Time Clock demand: If the DataCORDER
1 cargo probe (thermistor input) is equipped with a charged battery pack and AC
power is not present, the DataCORDER will
7 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return)
power up when the real time clock indicates that
(dCF02=64) 3 USDA thermistor inputs
a data recording should take place. When the
1 humidity input
DataCORDER is finished recording, it will power
1 cargo probe (thermistor input)
down.
10 sensors 2 thermistor inputs (supply & return) During DataCORDER power-up, while using battery-
(dCF02=94) 3 USDA thermistor inputs pack power, the controller will perform a hardware volt-
1 humidity input age check on the battery. If the hardware check
1 cargo probe (thermistor input) passes, the controller will energize and perform a soft-
ware battery voltage check before DataCORDER log-
4.8.6 Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) ging. If either test fails, the real time clock battery
Three types of data sampling are available: average, power-up will be disabled until the next AC power
snapshot and USDA. When configured to average, the cycle. Further DataCORDER temperature logging will
average of readings taken every minute over the be prohibited until that time.
recording period is recorded. When configured to snap- An alarm will be generated when the battery voltage
shot, the sensor reading at the log interval time is transitions from good to bad indicating that the battery
recorded. When USDA is configured, supply and return pack needs recharging. If the alarm condition persists
temperature readings are averaged and the three for more than 24 hours on continuous AC power, it indi-
USDA probe readings are snapshot. cates that the battery pack needs replacement.

4.8.7 Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10) 4.8.9 Pre−Trip Data Recording

USDA and cargo probe alarms may be configured to The DataCORDER will record the initiation of a Pre-trip
OFF, ON or AUTO. test (refer to Section 5.8) and the results of each test
If a probe alarm is configured to OFF, the alarm for this included in Pre-trip. The data is time-stamped and may
probe is always disabled. be extracted via the Data Retrieval program. Refer to
Table 4–9 for a description of the data stored in the
If a probe alarm is configured to ON, the associated DataCORDER for each corresponding Pre-trip test.
alarm is always enabled.
If the probes are configured to AUTO, they act as a 4.8.10 DataCORDER Communications
group. This function is designed to assist users who Data retrieval from the DataCORDER can be accom-
keep the DataCORDER configured for USDA record- plished by using the DataLINE, DataBANK Card, or a
ing, but do not install the probes for every trip. If all the communications interface module.
probes are disconnected, no alarms are activated. As
soon as one of the probes is installed, all of the alarms
are enabled and the remaining probes that are not NOTICE
installed will give active alarm indications.
A DataLINE or a communications inter-
face module display of Communication
Failed is caused by faulty data transfer

T-365 Rev B 4–18

 between the DataCORDER and the data In response to the demand to replace fumigation
retrieval device. with this environmentally sound process, Carrier
Common causes include: has integrated Cold Treatment capability into its
microprocessor system. These units have the ability
1. Bad cable or connection between Data- to maintain supply air temperature within one quar-
CORDER and data retrieval device. ter degree Celsius of set point and record minute
2. PC communication port(s) unavailable or changes in product temperature within the Data-
mis−assigned. CORDER memory, thus meeting USDA criteria.
Information on USDA is provided in the following
Configuration identification for the models covered
sub-paragraphs.
herein may be obtained on the Container Products
Group Information Center by authorized Carrier Transi- a. USDA Recording
cold Service Centers. A special type of recording is used for USDA
a. DataLINE cold treatment purposes. Cold treatment record-
ing requires three remote temperature probes be
The DataLINE software for a personal computer
placed at prescribed locations in the cargo. Pro-
is supplied on both floppy disks and CD. This
vision is made to connect these probes to the
software allows interrogation, configuration vari-
DataCORDER via receptacles located at the
able assignment, screen view of the data, hard
rear left-hand side of the unit. Four or five recep-
copy report generation, cold treatment probe
tacles are provided. The four 3-pin receptacles
calibration and file management. Refer to Data
are for the probes. The 5-pin receptacle is the
Retrieval manual 62-10629 for a more detailed
rear connection for the Interrogator. The probe
explanation of the DataLINE interrogation soft-
receptacles are sized to accept plugs with tricam
ware. The DataLINE manual may be found on
coupling locking devices. A label on the back
the internet at [Link].
panel of the unit shows which receptacle is used
b. DataBANK Card for each probe.
The DataBANK™card is a PCMCIA card that The standard DataCORDER report displays the
interfaces with the controller through the pro- supply and return air temperatures. The cold
gramming slot and can download data at a fast treatment report displays USDA #1, #2, #3 and
rate. Files downloaded to DataBANK card files the supply and return air temperatures. Cold
are accessible through an Omni PC Card Drive. treatment recording is backed up by a battery so
The files can then be viewed using the DataLINE recording can continue if AC power is lost.
software.
b. USDA/ Message Trip Comment
c. Communications Interface Module A special feature in DataLINE allows the user to
The communications interface module is a slave enter a USDA (or other) message in the header
module, which allows communication with a of a data report. The maximum message length
master central monitoring station. The module is 78 characters. Only one message will be
will respond to communication and return infor- recorded per day.
mation over the main power line.
4.8.12 USDA Cold Treatment Procedure
With a communications interface module
installed, all functions and selectable features The following is a summary of the steps required to
that are accessible at the unit may be performed initiate a USDA Cold Treatment:
at the master station. Retrieval of all Data- a. Calibrate the three USDA probes by ice bathing
CORDER reports may also be performed. Refer the probes and performing the calibration func-
to the master system technical manual for fur- tion with the DataLINE. This calibration proce-
ther information. dure determines the probe offsets and stores
them in the controller for use in generating the
4.8.11 USDA Cold Treatment
cold treatment report. Refer to the Data Retrieval
Sustained cold temperature has been employed as manual 62-10629 for more details.
an effective postharvest method for the control of
Mediterranean and certain other tropical fruit flies. b. Pre-cool the container to the treatment tempera-
Exposing infested fruit to temperatures of 2.2°C ture or below.
(36°F) or below for specific periods results in the
c. Install the DataCORDER module battery pack (if
mortality of the various stages of this group of
not already installed).
insects.

4–19 T-365 Rev B

 d. Place the three probes. The probes are placed 3. The left display will show “AL#” where # is the
into the pulp of the product (at the locations alarms number in the queue. The right display
defined in the following table) as the product is will show “AA##,” if the alarm is active, where ##
loaded. is the alarm number. “IA##,” will show if the
alarm is inactive.
Sensor 1 Place in pulp of the product located
next to the return air intake. 4. “END” is displayed to indicate the end of the
alarm list if any alarms are active. “CLEAr” is dis-
Sensor 2 Place in pulp of the product five feet played if all the alarms in the list are inactive.
from the end of the load for 40 foot con-
tainers, or three feet from the end of 5. If no alarms are active, the alarm queue may be
the load for 20 foot containers. This cleared. The exception to this rule is the Data-
CORDER alarm queue Full alarm (AL91), which
probe should be placed in a center car-
does not have to be inactive in order to clear the
ton at one-half the height of the load.
alarm list.
Sensor 3 Place in pulp of product five feet from
the end of the load for 40 foot contain- To clear the alarm list:
ers or three feet from the end of the
1. Press the ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys.
load for 20 foot containers. This probe
should be placed in a carton at a side 2. Press the UP/DOWN ARROW key until “CLEAr”
wall at one-half the height of the load. is displayed.

e. To initiate USDA recording, connect the per- 3. Press the ENTER key. The alarm list will clear
sonal computer and perform the configuration as and “-----” will be displayed.
follows, using the DataLINE software: 4. Press the ALARM LIST key. “AL” will show on
1. Enter ISO header information. the left display and “-----” on the right display
when there are no alarms in the list.
2. Enter a trip comment if desired.
5. Upon clearing of the alarm queue, the alarm light
3. Configure the DataCORDER for five probes will be turned off.
(s, r, P1, P2, P3) (dcf02=5).
4.8.14 ISO Trip Header
4. Configure the logging interval for one hour.
DataLINE provides the user with an interface to view/
5. Set the sensor configuration to “USDA.” modify current settings of the ISO trip header through
the ISO Trip Header screen.
6. Configure for two byte memory storage for- The ISO Trip Header screen is displayed when the
mat (dcf04=LONG). user clicks on the “ISO Trip Header” button in the “Trip
Functions” Group Box on the System Tools screen.
7. Perform a “trip start.”
F9 function - Provides the user with a shortcut for man-
4.8.13 DataCORDER Alarms ually triggering the refresh operation. Before sending
modified parameter values, the user must ensure that a
The alarm display is an independent DataCORDER successful connection is established with the control-
function. If an operating parameter is outside of the ler.
expected range or a component does not return the
If the connection is established with the DataCORDER,
correct values to the DataCORDER, an alarm is gener-
the current contents of the ISO Trip Header from the
ated. The DataCORDER contains a buffer of up to
DataCORDER will be displayed in each field. If the
eight alarms. A listing of the DataCORDER alarms is
connection is not established with the DataCORDER,
provided in Table 4–10. Refer to Section 4.8.7 for con- all fields on the screen will be displayed as “Xs.” If at
figuration information. any time during the display of the ISO Trip Header
screen the connection is not established or is lost, the
To display alarm codes: user is alerted to the status of the connection.
1. While in the Default Display mode, press the After modifying the values and ensuring a successful
ALT. MODE & ALARM LIST keys. This accesses connection has been made with the DataCORDER,
the Data-CORDER Alarm List Display Mode, click on the “Send” button to send the modified param-
which displays any alarms stored in the alarm eter values.
queue. The maximum allowed length of the ISO Trip Header is
128 characters. If the user tries to refresh the screen or
2. To scroll to the end of the alarm list, press the close the utility without sending the changes made on
UP ARROW. Depressing the DOWN ARROW the screen to the DataCORDER, the user is alerted
key will scroll the list backward. with a message.

T-365 Rev B 4–20

4.9 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION VARIABLES

NOTICE
Configuration numbers with an “ * ” must be changed to the bold option for a default controller
to operate on a PrimeLINE Edge Unit.

Configuration numbers with a bold option should be changed for a default controller to oper-
ate on a PrimeLINE Edge Unit.

Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables

CONFIG. # TITLE DEFAULT OPTION
CnF02 Evaporator Fan Speed dS (Dual) SS (Single)

CnF03 Control Temperature Sensors FOUr duAL

CnF04 Enable Dehumidification On OFF

CnF06 * Variable Speed Condenser Fan OFF On

CnF08 Evaporator Motor Type 1Ph 3Ph

CnF09 Refrigerant Selection r134a r744

CnF11 Defrost “Off” Selection noOFF OFF

CnF15 Enable Discharge Temperature Sensor Out In

CnF17 Enable Discharge Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)

CnF18 Heater Type Old (Low Watt) nEW (High Watt)

CnF20 Enable Suction Pressure Transducer Out (No) In (Yes)

CnF22 Economy Mode OFF Std, Full

CnF23 Enable Defrost Interval Save noSAv SAv

CnF24 Enable Long Pre-trip Test Series Auto Auto2, Auto 3

CnF25 Enable Pre-trip Data Recording rSLtS dAtA

CnF26 Heat Lockout Temperature Set to -10C Set to -5C

CnF27 Enable Suction Temperature Sensor Out In

CnF28 Enable Bulb Mode NOr bULb

CnF31 Probe Check SPEC Std

CnF33 Enable Snap Freeze OFF SnAP

CnF34 Temperature Unit Display bOth F

CnF41 Enable Low DTT Setting Out In

CnF44 Autoslide Enable Out LO, UP

CnF45 Low Humidity Enabled Out In

CnF47 Vent Position OFF UP, LOW, CUStOM

CnF49 OEM Reset Option OFF 0-off,1-std, 2-spec,3-cust

CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface 0-out 1-in

CnF51 Timed Defrost Disable 0-out 1-in

CnF52 Oil Return Algorithm 0-out 1-in

CnF53 Water Cool Oil Return Logic 0-out 1-in

CnF57 * PWM Compressor Control 0-out 1-in, 3 = DLV/DUV

Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
T-365 3−20 configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller pro-
gramming.

4–21 T-365 Rev B

Table 4–4 Controller Configuration Variables
CONFIG. # TITLE DEFAULT OPTION
CnF58 * Condenser Motor Type 0-1Phase C 1-3Phase C

CnF59 Electronic Evaporator Expansion Valve 0-none 1-EC, 2-KE, 3- NA

CnF61 ACT ASC Control Enable 0-out 1-in

CnF62 Extended Temperature Control Enable 0-out 1-in

CnF63 CCPC Pre-trip/Trip Start Default State 0-on 1-off

CnF64 Enable Fan Pulsing Logic 0-in 1-out

CnF66 High Speed Evaporator Fan Option 0-off 1-on

CnF67 Air Heaters 0-out 1-in

CnF68 Enable Default Pulsing Temperature 0-out 1-in

CnF70 Enable XtendFRESH Logic 0-out 1-in

CnF71 XtendFRESH Pretrip/Trip Start Default State OFF On

CnF72 Enhance Economy Mode OFF On

CnF73 Custom Defrost Mode 0-out 1-in

Note: Configuration numbers not listed are not used in this application. These items may appear when loading
T-365 3−20 configuration software to the controller but changes will not be recognized by the controller pro-
gramming.

4.10 CONTROLLER FUNCTION CODES

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes

Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION

NOTICE
If the function is not applicable, the display will read “-----”
Display Only Functions − Cd01 through Cd26 are display only functions.
Display Only Functions
Digital Unloader Valve Closed (%) Displays the DUV percent closed. The right display reads 100% when the valve is
Cd01 fully closed. The valve will usually be at 10% on start up of the unit except in very
high ambient temperatures.

The current sensor measures current draw in lines L1 & L2 by all of the high voltage
Cd03 Compressor Motor Current components. It also measures current draw in compressor motor leg T3. The com-
pressor leg T3 current is displayed.

The current sensor measures current on two legs. The third unmeasured leg is cal-
Line Current,
Cd04 culated based on a current algorithm. The current measured is used for control and
Phase A
diagnostic purposes. For control processing, the highest of the Phase A and B cur-
rent values is used for current limiting purposes. For diagnostic processing, the cur-
Line Current,
Cd05 rent draws are used to monitor component energization. Whenever a heater or a
Phase B
motor is turned ON or OFF, the current draw increase/reduction for that activity is
measured. The current draw is then tested to determine if it falls within the expected
Line Current,
Cd06 range of values for the component. Failure of this test will result in a Pre-trip failure
Phase C
or a control alarm indication.

Cd07 Main Power Voltage The main supply voltage is displayed.

The value of the main power frequency is displayed in Hertz. The frequency dis-
Cd08 Main Power Frequency
played will be halved if either fuse F1 or F2 is bad (alarm code AL21).

Cd09 Ambient Temperature The ambient sensor reading is displayed.

Cd10 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Evaporator temperature sensor reading is shown on the right display.

Compressor discharge temperature sensor reading, using compressor dome tem-

Cd11 Compressor Discharge Temperature
perature, is displayed.

T-365 Rev B 4–22

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Reading for evaporator pressure transducer (EPT) is shown on the left display;
Cd12 Compressor Suction Pressure Press ENTER at Cd12 to show reading for compressor suction port pressure on right
display.

Cd14 Compressor Discharge Pressure Compressor discharges pressure transducer reading is displayed.

Cd15 Digital Unloader Valve The status of the valve is displayed (Open - Closed).

This code displays the compressor motor hours. User can view unit run time by
pressing the ENTER key while in Cd16. Total hours are recorded in increments of
Compressor Motor Hour Meter/Unit
Cd16 10 hours (i.e., 3000 hours is displayed as 300).
Run Time Hour Meter
The Compressor Motor Hour Meter display can be reset to 0 by pressing and holding
the ENTER key for 5 seconds. The Unit Run Time Hour Meter cannot be reset.

Humidity sensor reading is displayed. This code displays the relative humidity, as a
Cd17 Relative Humidity %
percent value.

Cd18 Software Revision # The software revision number is displayed.

This code checks the Controller/DataCORDER battery pack. While the test is run-
ning, “btest” will flash on the right display, followed by the result. “PASS” will be dis-
played for battery voltages greater than 7.0 volts. “FAIL” will be displayed for battery
Cd19 Battery Check
voltages between 4.5 and 7.0 volts, and “-----” will be displayed for battery voltages
less than 4.5 volts. After the result is displayed for four seconds, “btest” will again be
displayed, and the user may continue to scroll through the various codes.

Config/Model # This code indicates the dash number of the model for which the Controller is config-
ured (i.e., if the unit is a 69NT40-551-100, the display will show “51100”). To display
controller configuration database information, press ENTER. Values in “CFYYM-
Cd20
MDD” format are displayed if the controller was configured with a configuration card
or with a valid OEM serial port configuration update; YYMMDD represents the pub-
lication date of the model configuration database.

Cd21 Capacity Mode The mode of operation is displayed (Unloaded - Standard - Economized).

Cd22 Compressor State The status of the compressor is displayed (OFF, On).

Cd23 Evaporator Fan Displays the current evaporator fan state (OFF, LOW, HIGH).

Compressor Run Time Remaining This code displays the time remaining until the unit goes into defrost (in tenths of an
Cd25
Until Defrost hour). This value is based on the actual accumulated compressor running time.

Cd26 Defrost Temperature Sensor Reading Defrost temperature sensor reading is displayed.

Configurable Functions

NOTICE
Function codes Cd27 through Cd37 are user−selectable functions. The operator can change
the value of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
This is the desired period of time between defrost cycles. Factory default is 3 hours.
Refer to Section 4.3.20 for information on Defrost Interval.
CnF11 determines whether the operator will be allowed to chose “OFF” as a defrost
interval option.
CnF64 determines whether the operator will be allowed to choose “PuLS” as a de-
frost interval option. For units operating with “PuLS” selected, defrost interval is de-
termined by the unit temperature setpoint and the Evaporator Fan Pulsing
Temperature Setting (Cd60). When the unit temperature setpoint is equal to or
less than the Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature Setting, the defrost interval is set
Cd27 Defrost Interval (Hours or Automatic) to 6 hours. Otherwise, the defrost interval is determined using the Automatic Defrost
Interval Determination logic. In either case, “PuLS” remains displayed in this function
select code.
After a new Defrost Interval is selected, the previously selected Interval is used until
the next defrost termination, the next time the DTT contacts are OPEN, or the next
time power to the control is interrupted. If the previous value or the new value is
“OFF”, the newly selected value will be used immediately.
If any Auto Pretrip sequence is initiated, Cd27 will be set to ’AUTO’ unless CnF49
(OEM Reset) is set to “Custom” AND CnF64 (Evaporator Fan Pulsing Logic) config-
uration variable is set to IN, in which case Cd27 will be set to “PuLS”.

4–23 T-365 Rev B

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Temperature Units (Degrees C or De- This code determines the temperature units (C or F) that will be used for all tempera-
grees F) ture displays. The user selects C or F by selecting function code Cd28 and pushing
Cd28
the ENTER key. The factory default value is Celsius units. This function code will dis-
play “-----“ if CnF34 is set to F.

If all of the control sensors are out of range (alarm code AL26) or there is a probe
circuit calibration failure (alarm code AL27), the unit will enter the shutdown state de-
fined by this setting. The user selects one of four possible actions as follows:
A - Full Cooling (Compressor is on, economized operation.)
Cd29 Failure Action (Mode) b - Partial Cooling (Compressor is on, standard operation.)
C - Evaporator Fan Only (Evaporator fans on high speed, not applicable with fro-
zen set points.)
d - Full System Shutdown - Factory Default (Shut down every component in the
unit.)

The in-range tolerance will determine the temperature band around the set point
which will be designated as in-range. For normal temperature control, control tem-
perature is considered in range if it is within setpoint in-range Tolerance. There are
four possible values:
1 = +/- 0.5°C (+/-0.9°F)
2 = +/- 1.0°C (+/-1.8°°F)
3 = +/- 1.5°C (+/-2.7°F)
Cd30 IIn-Range Tolerance 4 = +/- 2.0°C (+/-3.6°F) - Factory Default
If the control temperature is in-range, the green IN-RANGE light will be illuminated.
In-range tolerance shall be set to +/- 2.0°C upon activation of dehumidification or
bulb mode (Cd33, Cd35, Cd48).
When CCPC is actively controlling, in-range tolerance is not considered.
“-----“ will be displayed whenever Dehumidification or Bulb mode is enabled or when
CCPC with six hour re-activation is actively controlling.
“-----“ will be displayed whenever Frozen Economy Mode is operating.

The stagger start offset time is the amount of time that the unit will delay at start-up,
thus allowing multiple units to stagger their control initiation when all units are pow-
Cd31 Stagger Start Offset Time (Seconds)
ered up together. The eight possible offset values are 0 (Factory Default), 3, 6, 9, 12,
15, 18 or 21 seconds.

The current limit is the maximum current draw allowed on any phase at any time.
Limiting the unit’s current reduces the load on the main power supply. When desir-
Cd32 Current Limit (Amperes) able, the limit can be lowered. Note, however, that capacity is also reduced. The five
values for 460 VAC operation are: 15, 17, 19, 21, or 23 amperes. The factory default
setting is 21 amperes.

This is the value in percent to which the system will dehumidify or humidify. There
are configuration variables that determine whether dehumidification/humidification
capabilities are installed. In the test mode, the setpoint will be temporarily set to 1%,
allowing the test of dehumidification. After 5 minutes, the normal setpoint is restored.
If unit is configured for HUMIDIFICATION MODE then selection of a setpoint greater
Cd33 Humidity Setpoint
than 75% will activate humidification, and a setpoint less than or equal to 75% will
activate dehumidification. If the unit is configured for dehumidification only, then the
entire setpoint range will apply to dehumidification. If Pretrip is initiated, this value
will be set to “OFF” automatically.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)

The current state of the economy mode option, “-----”, On, or Off. CnF22 determines
Cd34 Economy Mode (On-Off) whether economy mode offered. Economy mode is a user selectable mode of oper-
ation provided for power saving purposes.

The current state of the bulb mode option, “-----”, nOr, or bULb. (Replaced by Cd48
if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.) Bulb mode is an extension of dehumidifi-
cation control (Cd33). If dehumidification (CnF04) is set to “Off,” Cd35 will display
“Nor” and the user will be unable to change it. CnF28 determines whether the bulb
Cd35 Bulb Mode
mode selection is offered. After a dehumidification set point has been selected and
entered for code Cd33, the user may then change Cd35 to “bulb.” After Bulb Mode
has been selected and entered, the user may then utilize function codes Cd36 and
Cd37 to make the desired changes.

T-365 Rev B 4–24

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
This is the desired evaporator fan speed for use during the bulb Dehumidification
and Humidification mode option.
(Replaced by Cd48 if CnF50, Enhanced Bulb Mode, is active.)
This code is enabled only if in the dehumidification mode (Cd33) and bulb mode
(Cd35) has been set to “bulb.” If these conditions are not met, “alt” will be displayed
(indicating that the evaporator fans will alternate their speed) and the display cannot
Cd36 Evaporator Fan Speed Select
be changed.
If a dehumidification set point has been selected along with bulb mode then “alt” may
be selected for alternating speed, “Lo” for low speed evaporator fan only, or “Hi” for
high speed evaporator fan only.
If a setting other than “alt” has been selected and bulb mode is deactivated in any
manner, then selection reverts back to “alt.”

This is the variable defrost termination thermostat setting to be used with the optional
bulb mode functionality. This item is only displayed if the bulb mode option is config-
Cd37 Variable DTT Setting (Bulb Mode)
ured on.
(Replaced by Cd48 interface if CnF50 Enhanced Bulb Mode Interface is active.)

Display Only Functions − Cd38 through Cd40 are display only functions.
Cd38 will display the current supply recorder sensor (SRS) reading for units config-
Secondary Supply Temperature Sen- ured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd38 will display
Cd38
sor “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd38 will display the supply re-
corder sensor reading.

Cd39 will display the current return recorder sensor (RRS) reading for units config-
Secondary Return Temperature Sen- ured for four probes. If the unit is configured with a DataCORDER, Cd39 will display
Cd39
sor “-----.” If the DataCORDER suffers a failure, (AL55) Cd39 will display the return re-
corder sensor reading.

If a valid container id exists, the default display for Cd40 will be “cd40_XXXXX”
where “XXXXX” is the 5th character through the 9th character of the container id.
Pressing the Enter key on Cd40 will display “id_YYYYYYY” where “YYYYYYY” is the
5th character to the 11th character of the container id.
If no valid container id exists or the container id is blank, the default display will have
Cd40 on the left display and the right display will alternate between “_nEEd” and
“___id”. Pressing the enter key while on Cd40 in the state will prompt the Set Id In-
Cd40 Container Identification Number
terface.
On start up if the container id is not valid, Cd40 will be brought up on the display for
the first minute of power up. This can be left by either entering a container id or leav-
ing the code select normally.
Cd40 is configured at commissioning to read a valid container identification number.
The reading will not display alpha characters; only the numeric portion of the number
will display.

SERVICE FUNCTION: This code is used for troubleshooting, and allows manual po-
sitioning of the economizer solenoid valve, electronic expansion valve, and digital
Cd41 Valve Override
unloader valve. Provides readings such as: Percent Capacity, EEV, Capacity Mode,
LIV and DUV. Refer to paragraph 6.21 for operating instructions.

NOTICE
For Units configured for eAutoFresh Cd43 and Cd44 using the following:
Configurable Functions − Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.

4–25 T-365 Rev B

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows the opening and closing of
a mechanical air vent door via a stepper motor. These selection modes are as fol-
lows:
OFF - Air makeup vent will remain closed.
USER - Allows for manual selection of the setting.
DELAY -The opening of the door is based on selected time, return temperature
and flow rate (percent opened).
Cd43 eAutoFresh Mode
gASLM - The opening is based percent open and CO2 and O2 selectable limits
(LM). This selection is only active if the unit has a CO2 sensor.
TEST / CAL (CO2 sensor option units only) - The door will fully open and close
to allow the user to inspect its operation. If CAL is selected, the controller will
zero calibrate the CO2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured with AutoFresh, the Cd43 will display “----”
Refer to Section 5.4.3 for description of operational parameters.

Display Only Function − Cd44 is a display only function.

Cd44 Code Cd44 displays the eAutoFresh CO2 and O2 values (CO2 and O2) and CO2 and
O2 limits (CO2 LIM and O2 LIM), respectively.
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for eAutoFresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 sensor is not detected, and a sensor is not
expected (didn’t have one previously).
eAutoFresh Values / CO2 Sensor Sta-
This function code will display “ChECK” if a CO2 sensor has not been auto-detected
tus
at the most recent power-up and was detected at a previous power-up. If “ChECK”
is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, “SEnSr” is displayed with the choices
of “YES” and “no”:
“YES” – sensor should be remembered as detected (present)
“no” – sensor should not be remembered as being detected (not present)

NOTICE
For Units configured for XtendFRESH Cd43 and Cd44 using the following:
Configurable Functions − Cd43 is a user-selectable function. The operator can change the value of this function
to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd43 Cd43 is a user selectable mode of operation that allows the opening and closing of
an air vent door and CO2 scrubber unit. These selection modes are as follows:
OFF - Vent will remain closed and scrubber will remain off.
XTEND - The opening of the vent and activation of the scrubber will be controlled
based upon CO2 and O2 concentration values and selectable set points. This selec-
tion is only active if the unit has a CO2 or O2 sensor.
TEST - Selecting “TEST” will open/close the vent and activate/deactivate the scrub-
XtendFresh Mode
ber to allow the user to confirm operation. If “CAL” is selected, the controller will pro-
vide options for zero calibration of the CO2 sensor input and span calibration of the
O2 sensor input.
If the unit is not configured for XtendFRESH or eAutoFresh, the Cd43 will display
“−−−−”.
Refer to section 4.6.1 for description of operational parameters.

Display Only Function − Cd44 is a display only function.

Cd44 If a user presses Enter, the CO2 value will be displayed. Pressing Enter again will
display the O2 value.
XtendFRESH Values / CO2 Sensor This function code will be dashed out if not configured for XtendFRESH or eAuto-
Status Fresh.
This function code will be dashed if CO2 and O2 sensors are not detected, and sen-
sors are not expected.

Configurable Functions − Cd45 through Cd48 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.

T-365 Rev B 4–26

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Values: 0 to 240 for UPPER / 0 to 225 for LOWER
This function code will be dashed out if not configured for VPS.
When configured for VPS, Cd45 displays the current vent position in units of 5 CMH
(units displayed as “CM”) or CFM (units displayed as “CF”) depending on the selec-
Cd45 Vent Position Sensor (VPS) Position tion of Cd46 (Airflow display units), Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the deg
C/F key.
Cd45 will display whenever the control detects movement via the sensor unless
AL50 is active. Cd45 will display for 30 seconds, then time out and return to the nor-
mal display mode.

Selects the airflow units to be displayed by Cd45 if configured for Vent Position Sen-
sor or displayed by “USER/FLO” under Cd43 if configured for Autoslide.
CF= Cubic Feet per Minute
Cd46 Airflow Display Units
CM=Cubic Meters per Hour
bOth=Displays CF or CM depending on the setting of Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the
pressing of the degree C/F key.

Used when Economy Mode (CnF22) is set to 3−cust. Display will show “----” when
the unit is not configured for Economy Mode.
When the unit has a perishable setpoint and Economy Mode is active, at the start of
Variable Economy Temperature Set- each cooling or heating cycle, high speed evaporator fans will run for 3 minutes. After
Cd47
ting three minutes, the evaporator fans will be switched to low speed any time that the
supply temperature is within +/− 0.25C of the setpoint and the return temperature is
less than or equal to the supply temperature + the user selected Cd47 (values are
0.5 C − 4.0 C, default is 3.0 C).

Initially Cd48 will display current dehumidification-mode; bUlb - bulb cargo mode,
dEhUM - normal dehumidification, or OFF - off. This display is steady.
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter se-
lection menus (mode, setpoint, evaporator speed, DTT setting). Pressing ENTER
key in any parameter selection menu commits to selection of the currently displayed
parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next parameter selection
menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display and the cur-
rent selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection ac-
tivity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd48 display
mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to normal
system display and the current selection menu is canceled, but any previously com-
mitted changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration options
and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Whenever any pretrip test is initiated, dehumidification-mode goes to OFF.
Whenever dehumidification-mode goes to OFF:
• Dehumidification control setpoint goes to 0% RH internally but will then ini-
tialize to 95% RH when dehumidification-mode leaves OFF.
Dehumidification / Bulb Cargo Mode • Evaporator speed select goes to Alt for units without PWM Compressor
Cd48
Parameter Selection Control (Cnf57 = Out), Evaporator speed select goes to Hi for units with
PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In).
• DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or 18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to bUlb, DTT setting goes to 18.0°C if it had
been set higher.
Whenever dehumidification-mode is set to dEhUM, DTT setting goes to 25.6°C or
18.0°C, depending on Cnf41.
For units without PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = Out):
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set below 65% RH evapora-
tor speed select goes to LO if it had been set to Hi.
• Whenever dehumidification control setpoint is set above 64% RH evapora-
tor speed select goes to Alt if it had been set to LO.
For units with PWM Compressor Control (Cnf57 = In):
• - Whenever dehumidification control set point is set below 60% RH, the
evaporator fan speed is set to LO, the user has the ability to set the evapo-
rator fan speed to Hi via the keypad.
• - Whenever dehumidification control set point is set equal to or above 60%
RH, the evaporator fan speed is set to Hi, the user has the ability to set the
evaporator fan speed to LO via the keypad.

4–27 T-365 Rev B

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Display Only Function − Cd49 is a display only function.

Displays the number of days since last successful pretrip sequence.

Press ENTER to view the number of days since the last successful pretrip for Auto1,
Cd49 Days Since Last Successful Pre-trip Auto2, and Auto2 in sequence.
Press CODE SELECT to step back through the list and ultimately to exit the Cd49
display.

Configurable Functions − Cd50 through Cd53 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
”OFF” = disabled.
”On” = enabled.
”SEtPt” = suspended by setpoint too low.
”CAHUM” = suspended by CA or humidity control.
”ACt” = suspended by ACT active.
”FAIL” = all return temperature probe failure for CCPC.
”PrtrP” = pretrip active.
Cd50 CCPC Disabled
”C LIM” = suspended by cool limit logic.
”PULL” = pulldown active.
“ALArM ” = suspended by shutdown alarm
Press enter, arrow keys, and then enter to select ”OFF” or ”On”.
If ”On” is selected, CCPC operation may be suspended as indicated by one of the
suspension codes listed above. If CCPC is not ”OFF” and is not suspended, ”On” will
be displayed.

ACT-mode:
Cd51 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ACT has completed
“ACt” value “On” “OFF” or “----“Display /Select: default “OFF“
“trEAt” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “0.0C“
“DAyS” value “0 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “0“
“ProbE” value Probe positions ex ’1 2 _ 4’ ’1 _ 3 _’ Display: default “---- “
“SPnEW” value C / F on 0.1 increments Display/Select: default “10.0C “
Initially Cd51 will display current countdown timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default“0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus (act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting).
Pressing ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus commits to selection
of the currently displayed parameter and causes the interface to descend into the
Automatic Cold Treatment Parameter next parameter selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a
Cd51
Selection blank display and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection
activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd51 display
mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to nor-
mal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any previously
committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration options
and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “Act” may not be altered if Cd51 is re-entered if
“Act” is “On”. When ACT has completed including reaching the new setpoint “done”
on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display will be
displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ACT off clears this entry. This
action also resets Cd51 to initial time remaining. ACT must then be turned on to
view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto Pre-trip test or Trip Start is initiated, ACT mode goes to OFF.

T-365 Rev B 4–28

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
ASC-mode:
Cd53 increments of (1 day)_(1hr), Display: default “0_0 “
“done” mm-dd this will be display is ASC has completed
“ASC” value “On” “OFF” Display /Select: default “OFF“
“nSC” value “1 - 6“ (This is the value “n” for the subsequent entries).
“SP (n-1)” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default
“10.0C“
“DAY (n-1)” value “1 – 99” increments of 1 Display/Select: default “1“
“SP (n)” value C / F on 0.1 degree increments Display/Select: default “10.0C
Initially Cd53 will display current count down timer increments of (1 day)_(1hr),
default “0_0
Pressing ENTER key will take the interface down into a hierarchy of parameter
selection menus, (mode, act, treat, days, probe and spnew setting). Pressing
ENTER key in any of the parameter selection menus selects the currently displayed
parameter and causes the interface to descend into the next parameter
Automatic Set point Change Mode
Cd53 selection menu. All parameter selection menus alternate between a blank display
Parameter Selection
and the current selection in the right hand display.
Pressing CODE SELECT key in a selection menu cancels the current selection
activity and ascends back up to the next higher selection menu (or to Cd53 display
mode if that is the next higher).
If the operator does not press any key for five seconds the interface reverts to nor-
mal system display and the current selection menu is cancelled, but any previously
committed changes are retained.
Available parameters and parameter ranges are a function of configuration options
and previously selected parameters as indicated above.
Parameter with the exception of “ASC” may not be altered if Cd53 is re-entered if
“ASC” is “On”. When ASC has completed including reaching the last setpoint
“done” on the left display and the MONTH DAY of completion on the right display
will be displayed as the second entry in the menu. Turning ASC off clears this entry.
This action also resets Cd53 to initial time remaining. ASC must then be turned on
to view or modify the additional parameters.
Whenever any auto pretrip test or Trip Start is initiated, ASC mode goes to OFF.

Display Only Functions − Cd54 through Cd58 are display only functions.
Reading for evaporator superheat (suction temperature minus suction saturation
Suction Port Superheat / Electronic temperature as calculated from suction pressure) is shown on the right display.
Cd54
Expansion Valve Status
Press ENTER at Cd54 to show reading for EEV position (in %) on left display.

Cd55 will display discharge superheat (discharge temperature minus discharge sat-
uration temperature as calculated from discharge pressure) values in C /F as calcu-
Cd55 Discharge Superheat
lated by the discharge temperature minus the discharge saturation temperature as
calculated from discharge pressure. “-----” will be displayed if selection is not valid.

Cd58 will display “CLOSE” if the WPS or CFS switch contacts are closed or if these
options are not installed. “OPEn” is displayed when the WPS or CFS switch con-
tacts are open. When the WPS/CFS Override Logic is “TRUE”, the right display will
flash on all units.
NOTE:

1. This CLOSE/OPEn state displayed in this Code Select function only applies
to units that have the ability to detect the state of a WPS/CFS. This function
should not be relied upon to display the condition of the switch on units that
Water Pressure Switch / Condenser don’t have a WPS/CFS switch connected to ECG2 exclusively.
Cd58 Fan Switch State or Override Logic
State 2. The right display will flash if the WPS/CFS Override Logic is TRUE on all
units. This is always the case, whether the unit has a WPS or CFS installed
or not.

3. The ability of the WPS/CFS Override Logic to control the condenser fan is
limited. It is not possible for this logic to control the fan on units that have
the WPS or CFS wired in series with the fan contactor. Units wired in this
configuration can indicate that the WPS/CFS Override Logic is active by
flashing the right display, however, the wiring will not allow for control of the
condenser fan.

4–29 T-365 Rev B

Table 4–5 Controller Function Codes
Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION
Configurable Functions − Cd59 through Cd61 are user-selectable functions. The operator can change the value
of these functions to meet the operational needs of the container.
Cd59 allows operation of the pump down logic control. The display will flash
between “STArT PdN” and “PrESS EnTEr”.
Upon entering Cd59 the operator will be required to acknowledge that they want to
initiate the pump down control. The display will flash between “STArT P dN” and
“PrESS EnTEr”. Once the decision to continue is confirmed pump down logic will
begin, and will take complete control of the unit until pump down either succeeds or
fails. This operation can not be halted once it begins without power cycling the unit.
After pump down logic has been initiated, the operator will be notified to close the
Cd59 Pump Down Logic
Liquid Line Valve, the display will flash between “CLOSE LLV” and “PrESS EnTEr”.
Once complete the display will read “P dN” to the left, and the current suction pres-
sure to the right.
If the automatic pump down logic succeeds within 20 minutes, the unit will turn itself
off, and the display will notify the operator that pump down is complete by flashing
between “P dN DOnE” and “SHUT OFF”. The operator must then shut off the unit.
If the automatic pump down logic does not complete within 20 minutes, the unit will
drop out of Cd59 and return to its previous control condition.

Cd60 contains a selectable temperature range used to determine the engagement

point of the Evaporator Fan Pulsing logic. Default setting is -18.1°C. The user may
Evaporator Fan Pulsing Temperature change the temperature by pressing enter, then scrolling to the desired temperature
Cd60
Setting using either arrow key. Press Enter to accept the change. The temperature setting
will be retained until either a Pretrip or Trip Start is initiated at which time the tem-
perature will set to the default setting.

Cd62 is used to force evaporator fan speed to high while temperature control is
being performed in the perishable setpoint range. When set to “On”, evaporator
fans operate in high speed regardless of any other active option that can control
evaporator fan speed.
Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is retained at its state
Cd62 High Speed Evaporator Fan Setting prior to the power cycle. If “On”, this function select code will be set to “OFF” when
any trip start occurs or any pretrip test is initiated.
Event 99 shall be logged when ever CD62 is Turned ON OR if CD62 state is ON at
Mid night. Event 100 shall be logged when ever CD62 is Turned OFF OR if CD62 is
dashed out from ON state to OFF state due to setpoint change to frozen range.
“-----” will be displayed if setpoint is in frozen range OR if Cnf66 is configured OFF.

Cd63 is used to enable Enhanced Economy Mode (EEM).

Following a power cycle, the state of the function select code is retained at its state
prior to the power cycle if CNF72 = Default ON else if Default OFF this will be set to
OFF . If “On”, this function select code will be set to “OFF” when any trip start
Cd63 Enhanced Economy Mode occurs or any pretrip test is initiated.
Event 120 shall be logged when ever CD63 is Turned ON OR if CD63 state is ON at
Mid night.
“-----” will be displayed if Cnf72 is configured OFF.

Cd64 is used to allow the use of a standard PrimeLine compressor in a PrimeLine

with edge technology unit.
Alternative Compressor Selection When “Std” is selected The Minimum allowable capacity ratio will be set to 10%,
Cd64
PrimeLine w/ Edge Technology Standard PrimeLine current limiting logic will be utilized, the original PrimeLine
P6−7 test will be used during PreTrip, and the DLV will remain de−energized.
“-----” will be displayed if Cnf57 is configured “0” or “1”.

T-365 Rev B 4–30

 Figure 4.12 Alarm Troubleshooting Sequence

Start
Troubleshooting

Unit does No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER

self test? Supply
Section 4.2

Yes

Did
Evaporator No Check Power Refer to CONNECT POWER
fans start? Supply Section 4.2

Yes

Correct No Install Latest Refer to CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

software Software
version? Revision Section 3.2

Yes

Unit Load correct

configured No Refer to Configuration Software (Variables)
unit Section 3.2.1
correctly? configuration

Yes

See alarm
Active Yes details & Refer to Controller Alarm Indications
Alarms? repair Table 3ï6

No

Pass No Refer to Pre-trip Diagnostics

Pre-trip Correct
inspection? all faults Section 3.7

Yes

Operating No Correct Refer to REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

pressures Refrigerant SERVICE Section 6.3
normal? issue

Yes

Unit OK

4–31 T-365 Rev B

4.11 CONTROLLER ALARM INDICATIONS

Table 4–6 Controller Alarm Codes

AL03 LOSS OF SUPERHEAT CONTROL

Cause: Superheat has remained below 1.66°C (3°F) degrees for five minutes continuously while compressor run-
ning. Compressor drawing more than 2.0 amps, compressor pressure ratio is greater than 1.8, and Electronic
Expansion Valve (EEV) is at 0% open.

Component Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV)

Troubleshooting Check the operation of the EEV using Cd41.

Corrective Action Replace EEV if defective.

Component Evaporator Temperature Sensor(s) ETS & ETS1.

Troubleshooting Verify accuracy of temperature sensors, refer to Sensor Checkout Proce-

dure Section 7.25.1.

Corrective Action Replace ETS or ETS1 if defective.

Component Evaporator Fans

Troubleshooting Confirm fans operating properly

Corrective Action Replace fan(s) if defective, refer to EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR ASSEM-
BLY Section 7.14.1.

-----

AL05 MANUAL DEFROST SWITCH FAILURE

Cause: Controller has detected continuous Manual Defrost Switch activity for five minutes or more.

Component Keypad Power cycle the unit.

Troubleshooting Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.

Corrective Action If the alarm reappears after 5 minutes replace the keypad.

-----

AL06 KEYPAD OR KEYPAD HARNESS FAIL

Cause: Controller has detected one of the keypad keys is continuously activity.

Component Keypad or Harness

Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the
unit.

Corrective Action If the alarm reappears replace the keypad and harness.

-----

AL07 FRESH AIR VENT OPEN WITH FROZEN SET POINT

Cause: The VPS is reading greater than 0 CMH while unit is in frozen mode.

Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

T-365 Rev B 4–32

AL07 FRESH AIR VENT OPEN WITH FROZEN SET POINT
Troubleshooting Manually reposition vent and confirm using Cd45. Refer to VENT POSITION
SENSOR SERVICE Section 7.26.

Corrective Action If unable to obtain zero reading, replace defective VPS.

-----

AL08 HIGH COMPRESSOR PRESSURE RATIO

Cause: Controller detects discharge pressure to suction pressure ratio is too high.
The controller will attempt to correct the situation by restarting the compressor.

Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 7.2.

Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

-----

AL10 CO2 SENSOR FAILURE

Cause: Alarm 10 is triggered when the CO2 sensor voltage is operating outside of the 0.9 v to 4.7 v range, or if the
sensor is out of range.

Component This is a display alarm and has no associated failure action.

Troubleshooting Refer to eAutoFresh manual.

Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when voltage is within operating range.

-----

AL14 PHASE SEQUENCE DETECT FAULT

Cause: Controller is unable to determine the correct phase relationship.

Component N/A

Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.

Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.

Component Wiring

Troubleshooting Check unit wiring.

Confirm pressure readings during start-up; suction pressure should de-
crease and discharge pressure should increase.

Corrective Action Correct wiring.

Component Current Sensor

Troubleshooting Check Cd41, right most digit:

If display is 3 or 4 check compressor / sensor wiring.
If display is 5 the current sensor is defective.

Corrective Action Replace current sensor if defective.

-----

4–33 T-365 Rev B

AL16 COMPRESSOR CURRENT HIGH
Cause: Compressor current draw is over the calculated maximum for 10 minutes.

Component Current Sensor

Troubleshooting Compare Cd3 to actual measured current at wire T1-T2 or T3 going to the
compressor contactor. If there is a difference, determine whether this is
caused by current sensor or amp clamp tool.

Corrective Action Replace current sensor if defective.

Component Amperage is indeed too high.

Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage/frequency is within specification and balanced ac-

cording to Electrical Data Section 3.3.

Corrective Action Correct power supply.

Component Operating Conditions

Troubleshooting Make sure system pressures are relevant to operating conditions.

Corrective Action Check air flow of condenser.

Check Refrigerant charge, refer to REFRIGERATION SYSTEM SERVICE
Section 7.3

Component Monitor Unit

Troubleshooting Alarm is display only the alarm may clear itself during operation

Corrective Action If alarm remains active or is repetitive replace compressor at next available
opportunity, refer to COMPRESSOR Service Section 7.8.

-----

AL17 COMPRESSOR PRESSURE DELTA FAULT

Cause: Compressor has attempted to start in both directions and fails to generate sufficient pressure differential be-
tween SPT and DPT.

Component N/A

Troubleshooting Controller will attempt restart every 20 minutes and deactivate the alarm if
successful.

Corrective Action Resume normal operation.

Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 7.2.

Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 7.2.

T-365 Rev B 4–34

AL17 COMPRESSOR PRESSURE DELTA FAULT
Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective.

Component Monitor unit

Troubleshooting Alarm is display only the alarm may clear itself during operation.

Corrective Action If alarm remains active or is repetitive replace compressor at next available
opportunity.

-----

AL18 DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH

Cause: Discharge pressure is over the maximum for 10 minutes within the last hour.

Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.

Troubleshooting Ensure Liquid Line Service Valve is fully open.

Corrective Action Open Liquid Line Service Valve as needed.

Component Filter Drier

Troubleshooting Check the filter drier, if it is iced up or very cold it indicates that the filter drier
needs replacement.

Corrective Action Replace the filter drier if needed, refer to FILTER DRIER Service Section
7.12.

Component Condenser Fan

Troubleshooting Check Condenser Fan for proper operation.

Corrective Action Correct as required.

Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 7.2.

Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.

Troubleshooting With the unit off allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against PT Chart for 134a, refer to Table 7–4.

Corrective Action Correct as required, refer to Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.

Component Refrigerant

Troubleshooting Check refrigerant level.

Corrective Action Correct as required, refer to Refrigerant Charge Section 7.7.1.

-----

4–35 T-365 Rev B

AL19 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH
Cause: Discharge temperature exceeds 135°C (275°F) for 10 minutes within the last hour.

Component Restrictions in the refrigeration system.

Troubleshooting Ensure the Discharge Service Valve is fully open.

Corrective Action Open the Discharge Service Valve as needed.

Troubleshooting Check the unit for air flow restrictions.

Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.

Component Non-condensables in the refrigeration system.

Troubleshooting With the unit off allow system to stabilize to ambient temperature.
Check system pressure against PT Chart for 134a, refer to Table 7–4.

Corrective Action Correct as required, refer to Refrigerant Charge Table 7.7.1.

Component Additional Alarms such as AL16, AL24.

Troubleshooting Check compressor operation.

Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor, replace the com-
pressor, refer to COMPRESSOR Service Section 7.8.

-----

AL20 CONTROL CONTACTOR FUSE (F3)

Cause: Control power fuse (F3A or F3B) is open.

Component Check F3A, if the fuse is open:

Troubleshooting Check PA, PB, CH coils for short to ground, if short is found:

Corrective Action Replace the defective coil.

Replace the fuse.

Component Check F3B, if the fuse is open:

Troubleshooting Check ESV coil resistance at TP7 to TP9, if short to ground, or if resistance
is less than 4 ohms, coil is defective.
Check CF, ES, EF, HR coils for short to ground, if short is found, coil is de-
fective.

Corrective Action Replace the defective coil.

Replace the fuse.

Component Check Voltage at QC1:

Troubleshooting If voltage is present, it indicates a defective microprocessor.

Corrective Action Refer to Controller Service Section 7.24.

-----

T-365 Rev B 4–36

AL21 CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSE (F1/F2)
Cause: One of the 18 VAC controller fuses (F1/F2) is open. Refer to Cd08.

Component System Sensors

Troubleshooting Check system sensors for short to ground.

Corrective Action Replace defective sensor(s)

Component Wiring

Troubleshooting Check wiring for short to ground.

Corrective Action Repair as needed.

Component Controller

Troubleshooting Controller may have an internal short.

Corrective Action Replace controller, refer to Controller Service Section 7.24.

-----

AL22 EVAPORATOR IP
Cause: Evaporator motor internal protector (IP) is open.

Component Evaporator Motor

Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power, & check Evaporator Motor IP at plug con-
nection pins 4 & 6.

Corrective Action Replace defective evaporator fan motor, refer to EVAPORATOR FAN MO-
TOR Service Section 7.14.

-----

AL23 LOSS OF PHASE B

Cause: Controller fails to detect current draw.

Component Incoming Power

Troubleshooting Check incoming power source.

Corrective Action Correct power source as required.

-----

AL24 COMPRESSOR IP
Cause: Compressor internal protector (IP) is open.

Component Compressor

Troubleshooting Shut down unit disconnect power, & check resistance of compressor wind-
ings at contactor T1-T2, T2-T3.

4–37 T-365 Rev B

AL24 COMPRESSOR IP
Corrective Action Monitor unit, if alarm remains active or is repetitive replace the compressor
at the next available opportunity, refer to COMPRESSOR Service Section
7.8.

-----

AL25 CONDENSER IP
Cause: Condenser fan motor internal protector (IP) is open.

Component Insufficient Air Flow

Troubleshooting Shut down unit and check condenser fan for obstructions.

Corrective Action Remove obstructions.

Component Condenser Fan Motor

Troubleshooting Shut down unit, disconnect power, & check Condenser Fan Motor IP at plug
connection pins KB5 & KB3.

Corrective Action Replace defective condenser fan motor, refer to Condenser Fan Motor As-
sembly Service Section 7.11.

-----

AL26 ALL SENSORS FAILURE: SUPPLY/RETURN PROBES

Cause: Sensors out of range.

Component All sensors detected as out of range

Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:

Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.

If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to TEM-

PERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

-----

AL27 ANALOG TO DIGITAL ACCURACY FAILURE

Cause: Controller AD converter faulty.

Component Controller

Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates a defective micropro-
cessor.

Corrective Action Replace defective microprocessor, refer to Controller Service Section 7.24.

-----

AL28 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE

Cause: Suction pressure too low for normal operation

Component N/A

T-365 Rev B 4–38

AL28 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE
Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit.

Corrective Action Resetting the unit may correct problem, monitor the unit.

Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate SPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 7.2

Corrective Action Replace SPT if defective

Component Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 7.2

Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective

-----

AL29 AUTOFRESH FAILURE

Cause: Alarm 29 is triggered if CO2 or O2 level is outside of the limit range and the vent position is at 100% for longer
than 90 minutes.

Component Alarm LED will be activated and user intervention is required.

Troubleshooting Refer to eAutoFresh manual.

Corrective Action The alarm is triggered off when atmospheric conditions are within limit set-
tings.

-----

AL50 AIR VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS)

Cause: VPS Sensor out of range.

Component Vent Position Sensor (VPS)

Troubleshooting Make sure VPS is secure.

Corrective Action Manually tighten panel.

Troubleshooting If the alarm persists, replace the sensor or the assembly.

Corrective Action Replace VPS.

-----

AL51 EEPROM FAILURE

Cause: Controller Memory Failure

Component Controller

Troubleshooting Pressing the ENTER key when “CLEAr” is displayed will result in an attempt
to clear the alarm.

4–39 T-365 Rev B

AL51 EEPROM FAILURE
Corrective Action If action is successful (all alarms are inactive), alarm 51 will be reset.

Troubleshooting Power cycle the unit. If the alarm persists, it indicates defective controller
memory.

Corrective Action Replace defective controller, refer to Controller Service Section 7.24

-----

AL52 EEPROM ALARM LIST FULL

Cause: Alarm list queue is full.

Component Active Alarms

Troubleshooting Repair any alarms in the queue that are active. Indicated by “AA”.

Corrective Action Clear alarms, refer to CONTROLLER ALARMS Section 4.6.

-----

AL53 BATTERY PACK FAILURE

Cause: Battery voltage low

Component Battery

Troubleshooting If this alarm occurs on start up, allow a unit fitted with rechargeable batteries
to operate for up to 24 hours to charge rechargeable batteries sufficiently.
Once fully charged, the alarm will deactivate.

Corrective Action To clear the alarm press ENTER and ALT simultaneously at the startup of
Cd19 (Battery Check).
If alarm persists, replace the battery pack, refer to Section 7.24.6 Battery
Replacement.

-----

AL54 PRIMARY SUPPLY SENSOR (STS)

Cause: Invalid Supply Temperature Sensor (STS) reading.

Component Supply Temperature Sensor (STS)

Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5: If P5 passes, no further action is required.

Corrective Action If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to TEM-
PERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

-----

AL56 PRIMARY RETURN SENSOR (RTS)

Cause: Invalid Return Temperature Sensor (RTS) reading.

Component Return Temperature Sensor (RTS)

Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:

Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.

T-365 Rev B 4–40

AL56 PRIMARY RETURN SENSOR (RTS)
If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to TEM-
PERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

-----

AL57 AMBIENT SENSOR (AMBS)

Cause: Invalid Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS) reading.

Component Ambient Temperature Sensor (AMBS)

Troubleshooting Test the AMBS, refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.25.1.

Corrective Action Replace AMBS if defective, refer to TEMPERATURE SENSOR Service

Section 7.25.

-----

AL58 COMPRESSOR HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY (HPS)

Cause: High pressure safety switch remains open for at least one minute.

Component High Pressure Switch (HPS)

Troubleshooting Test the HPS; refer to Checking High Pressure Switch, Section 7.9.1.

Corrective Action Replace HPS if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement, Section 7.25.

Component Refrigeration System

Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.

Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.

-----

AL59 HEATER TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (HTT)

Cause: Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT) is open.

Component Heat Termination Thermostat (HTT)

Troubleshooting Check for 24 volts at test point TP10, if no voltage at TP10 after unit has
reached set point HTT is open.

Corrective Action Replace HTT if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement Section 7.25.

-----

AL60 DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (DTS)

Cause: Failure of the Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) to open.

Component Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS)

Troubleshooting Test the DTS; refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.25.1.

Corrective Action Replace the DTS if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement Section 7.25.

-----

4–41 T-365 Rev B

AL61 HEATER CURRENT DRAW FAULT
Cause: Improper current draw during heat or defrost mode.

Component Heater(s)

Troubleshooting While in heat or defrost mode, check for proper current draw at heater con-
tactors, refer to ELECTRICAL DATA Section 3.3.

Corrective Action Replace heater(s) if defective, refer to Section 7.13.2 Evaporator Heater
Removal and Replacement.

Component Contactor

Troubleshooting Check voltage at heater contactor on the heater side. If no voltage present:

Corrective Action Replace heater contactor if defective.

-----

AL63 CURRENT LIMIT

Cause: Unit operating above current limit.

Component Refrigeration System

Troubleshooting Check unit for air flow restrictions.

Corrective Action Clean or remove any debris from coils.

Troubleshooting Check unit for proper operation.

Corrective Action Repair as needed.

Component Power supply

Troubleshooting Confirm supply voltage/frequency is within specification and balanced ac-

cording to ELECTRICAL DATA Section 3.3.

Corrective Action Correct power supply.

Component Current limit set too low.

Troubleshooting Check current limit setting Code Cd32.

Corrective Action The current limit can be raised (maximum of 23 amps) using Cd32.

-----

AL64 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CPDS)

Cause: Discharge Temperature sensor out of range.

Component Discharge temperature sensor (CPDS).

Troubleshooting Test the CPDS; refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure, Section 7.25.1.

Corrective Action Replace the CPDS if defective, refer to Sensor Replacement Section 7.25.

-----

T-365 Rev B 4–42

AL65 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (DPT)
Cause: Compressor Discharge Transducer is out of range.

Component Compressor Discharge Transducer (DPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate DPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD GAUGE SET
Section 7.2.

Corrective Action Replace DPT if defective.

-----

AL66 (SPT) SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER, (EPT) EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUC-

ER
Cause: Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) out of range.

Component Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

Troubleshooting Confirm accurate EPT and SPT pressure readings, refer to MANIFOLD
GAUGE SET Section 7.2. - Performing a Pre-trip 5-9 test will also check the
transducers.

Corrective Action Replace EPT/SPT if defective.

Troubleshooting Monitor

Corrective Action If the alarm persists, it may indicate a failing compressor, refer to COM-
PRESSOR Service Section 7.8.

-----

AL67 HUMIDITY SENSOR

Cause: Humidity Sensor (HS) reading out of range.

Component Humidity Sensor (HS)

Troubleshooting Make sure the humidity sensor is properly connected in the socket.

Corrective Action Make sure the humidity sensor wires have not been damaged.
Monitor, replace HS if alarm persists.

-----

AL69 EVAPORATOR TEMP SENSOR (ETS1)

Cause: Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) out of range.

Component Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1)

Troubleshooting Test the ETS1, refer to Sensor Checkout Procedure Section 7.25.1.

Corrective Action Replace Evaporator Temperature Sensor (ETS1) if defective.

-----

AL70 SECONDARY SUPPLY SENSOR (SRS)

Cause: Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS) is out of range.

4–43 T-365 Rev B

AL70 SECONDARY SUPPLY SENSOR (SRS)
Component Secondary Supply Sensor (SRS)

Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:

Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.

If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to TEM-

PERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

-----

AL71 SECONDARY RETURN SENSOR (RRS)

Cause: Secondary Return Sensor (RRS) is out of range.

Component Secondary Return Sensor (RRS)

Troubleshooting Perform Pre-trip P5:

Corrective Action If P5 passes, no further action is required.

If P5 fails, replace the defective sensor as determined by P5, refer to TEM-

PERATURE SENSOR Service Section 7.25.

-----

AL72 CONTROL TEMP OUT OF RANGE

Cause: After the unit goes in-range for 30 minutes then out of range for a continuous 120 minutes.

Component Refrigeration System

Troubleshooting Ensure unit is operating correctly.

Corrective Action Power cycle unit.

Control Temperature is in In-range.
Any Pre-trip mode, resets the timers.

-----

NOTICE
If the controller is configured for four probes without a DataCORDER, the DataCORDER alarms
AL70 and AL71 will be processed as Controller alarms AL70 and AL71. Refer to Table 4–10.

ERR# INTERNAL MICROPROCESSOR FAILURE

Cause: The controller performs self-check routines. If an internal failure occurs, an “ERR” alarm will appear on the
display. This is an indication the controller needs to be replaced.

Error Description

ERR 0-RAM failure Indicates that the controller working memory has failed.

ERR 1-Program Memory Fail- Indicates a problem with the controller program.
ure

ERR 2-Watchdog time-out The controller program has entered a mode whereby the controller program
has stopped executing.

ERR 3-N/A N/A

T-365 Rev B 4–44

ERR# INTERNAL MICROPROCESSOR FAILURE
ERR 4-N/A N/A

ERR 5-A-D failure The controller’s Analog to Digital (A-D) converter has failed.

ERR 6-IO Board failure Internal program/update failure.

ERR 7-Controller failure Internal version/firmware incompatible.

ERR 8-DataCORDER failure Internal DataCORDER memory failure.

ERR 9-Controller failure Internal controller memory failure.

In the event that a failure occurs and the display cannot be updated, the status LED will indicate the appro-
priate ERR code using Morse code as shown below.
E R R 0 to 9
ERR0 = . .-. .-. -----
ERR1 = . .-. .-. . ----
ERR2 = . .-. .-. . . ---
ERR3 = . .-. .-. . . . --
ERR4 = . .-. .-. . . . . -
ERR5 = . .-. .-. . . . . .
ERR6 = . .-. .-. -. . . .
ERR7 = . .-. .-. --. . .
ERR8 = . .-. .-. ---. .
ERR9 = . .-. .-. ---- .

-----

ENTR STPT ENTER SET POINT (PRESS ARROW & ENTER)

Cause: The controller is prompting the operator to enter a set point.

-----

LO LOW MAIN VOLTAGE (FUNCTION CODES CD27-38 DISABLED AND NO ALARM STORED.)
Cause: This message will be alternately displayed with the set point whenever the supply voltage is less than 75% of
its proper value.

-----

OLD HARDWARE DOES NOT INCLUDE A TRIAC ON THE KA06 OUTPUT

CNTRL
Cause: ML3 controllers with configuration variable 57 set to ”3” will generate this message.
This message will swap being the number one priority message with the highest priority message in the list
above.

-----

4–45 T-365 Rev B

4.12 CONTROLLER PRE−TRIP TEST CODES

Table 4–7 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes

CODE NO. TITLE DESCRIPTION

NOTICE
“Auto” or “Auto1” menu includes the: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6 and rSLts. “Auto2” menu
includes P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8, P9, P10 and rSLts. “Auto3” menu includes P0, P1,
P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7 and P8.

Container identifier code, Cd18 Software Revision Number, Cd20 Container

Unit Model Number, & configuration database identifier CFMMYYDD are dis-
played in sequence.
Next the unit will indicate the presence or non-presence of an RMU according
to whether any RMU inquiry messages have been received since the unit
Pre-Trip Initiated: was booted.
Configuration Dis-
Units equipped with Autoslide Enabled (Cnf44) will cause the vent to seek to
P0−0 play, Indicator
Lamps, LEDs, and
its closed position, followed by two sequences of opening to 100% and re-
Displays turning to the closed position. No other autoslide mode of operation will be
available until the two cycles of opening and closing have completed.
Since the system cannot recognize lights and display failures, there are no
test codes or results associated with this phase of Pretrip. To know if the test
passes the operator must observe that the LCD display elements and the in-
dicator lights behave as described below.

-----
P1 Tests - Heaters Current Draw: Heater is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No
other system components will change state during this test.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P1−0 Heaters Turned On Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.
P1−1 Heaters Turned Off Heater starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and then the
heater is turned on. After 15 seconds, the current draw is measured again.
The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if the change in current draw test is in the range specified.

-----
P2 Tests - Condenser Fan Current Draw: Condenser is first verified in low speed then in high speed. Current
draw must fall within specified range. No other system components will change state during this test. If the Water
Pressure Switch is open this test will be skipped

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P2−0 Condenser Fan High Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and con-
Speed denser fan is then turned on. After 10 seconds the current draw is measured
again. After the current is measured the Condenser fan is turned off and after
10 seconds a second off measurement is taken.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

T-365 Rev B 4–46

 CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION
P2−1 Condenser Fan Low Condenser fan starts in the off condition, current draw is measured, and Con-
Speed denser high speed fan is then turned on. After 10 seconds the current draw
is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded. After the
current is measured the Condenser fan is turned off and after 10 seconds a
second off measurement is taken.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
-----
P3 Tests - Low Speed Evaporator Fan Current Draw: The system must be equipped with a low speed evapora-
tor fan, as determined by CnF02, the Evaporator Fan Speed Select configuration variable. Low speed evaporator
fan is turned on, then off. Current draw must fall within specified range. No other system components will change
state during this test

NOTICE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the
start of either test, then the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the
test, then the test will fail upon conclusion of the test.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P3−0 Low Speed Evapora- High speed evaporator fans will be turned on for 20 seconds, the fans will be
tor Fan Motors On turned off for 4 seconds, current draw is measured, and then the low speed
evaporator fans are turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw is mea-
sured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.
P3−1 Low Speed Evapora- Low speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current
tor Fan Motors Off draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

-----
P4 Tests - High Speed Evaporator Fans Current Draw: High speed evaporator fans are turned on, then off. Cur-
rent draw must fall within specified range and measured current changes must exceed specified ratios. No other
system components will change state during this test.

NOTICE
If unit configured for single evaporator fan operation and either AL11 or AL12 is active at the
start of either test, the test will fail immediately. If AL11 or AL12 become active during the test,
the test will fail upon conclusion of the test.

..

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P4−0 High Speed Evapora- Evaporator fans start in the off condition, current draw is measured, then high
tor Fan Motors On speed evaporator fans will be turned on. After 60 seconds the current draw
is measured again. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw in the specified range AND measured
current changes exceed specified ratios.
If the three phase motors are configured IN, the change ratio test is skipped.
P4−1 High Speed Evapora- High speed evaporator fans are then turned off. After 10 seconds the current
tor Fan Motors Off draw is measured. The change in current draw is then recorded.
Test passes if change in current draw test is in the specified range.

4–47 T-365 Rev B

 -----
P5 Tests - Air Stream Temperature Sensor Tests: Tests the validity of the Air Stream Temperature Sensors..

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P5−0 Supply/Return Probe The High Speed Evaporator Fan is turned on and run for eight minutes, with
Test all other outputs de-energized. A temperature comparison is made between
the return and supply probes.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.

NOTICE
If this test fails, “P5−0” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this test and the PRIMARY/ SECONDARY) pass,
display will read “P5” “PASS.”
P5−1 Supply Probe Test This test if for units equipped with secondary supply probe only.
The temperature difference between primary supply probe and secondary
supply probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.

NOTICE
If this test fails, “P5−1” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this and the SUPPLY/RETURN TEST) pass,
because of the multiple tests, the display will read “P 5”
“PASS.”
P5−2 Return Probe Test For units equipped with secondary return probe only.
The temperature difference between return temperature sensor (RTS) and
return temperature sensor (RRS) probe is compared.
Test passes if temperature comparison falls within the specified range.

NOTICE
1. If this test fails, “P5-2” and “FAIL” will be displayed. If both
Probe tests (this test and the SUPPLY/RETURN) pass,
because of the multiple tests, the display will read “P 5,”
“PASS.”
2. The results of Pre-trip tests 5-0, 5-1 and 5-2 will be used to
activate or clear control probe alarms.
P5-3 Evaporator Fan Di- With evaporator fan running on high speed, measure the temperature differ-
rection Test ence between the primary supply and primary return probes. Turn the heat-
ers on for 60 seconds then measure the temperature difference between the
primary supply and primary return probes for up to 120 additional seconds.
This is a Pass/Fail test. The test passes if differential of STS is 0.25°C higher
than RTS.
Test P5-0 must pass before this test is run.
P5-7 Primary vs Second- This is a Pass/Fail test of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1)
ary Evaporator Tem- and secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2).
perature Sensor Test
Test passes if secondary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS2) is within +/
- 0.5°C of the primary evaporator temperature sensor (ETS1).

T-365 Rev B 4–48

 CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION
P5-8 Primary Evaporator This is a Pass/Fail test of the Primary Evaporator Pressure Transducer.
Pressure Transduc-
Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 0 psi of satura-
er Test
tion pressure at current evaporator temperature. Also passes if SPT is within
+/- 1 psi of discharge pressure 6 hours after a power interruption.
Test P5-7 must pass before this test is run.
P5-9 Suction (Evaporator) Units equipped with a secondary Evaporator pressure transducer.
Pressure Transduc-
Test passes if suction pressure transducer (SPT) is within +/- 1.5 psi of the
er Test
evaporator pressure transducer (EPT).
Test P5-8 must pass before this test is run.
P5−10 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail/Skip test of the humidity sensor configuration.
Controller Configura-
Test passes if the controller configuration has humidity sensor in.
tion Verification Test
Test fails if the controller configuration has humidity sensor out and Vout is
greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test is skipped if the controller configuration has the humidity sensor out and
Vout is less than 0.20 Volts.
Test P5-9 must pass before this test is run.
P5−11 Humidity Sensor In- This is a Pass/Fail test of humidity sensor installation (sensor is present).
stallation Verification
Test passes if Vout is greater than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test
Test fails if Vout is less than 0.20 Volts for the humidity sensor.
Test P5-10 must pass before this test is run.
P5-12 Humidity Sensor This is a Pass/Fail test of the Humidity Sensor Range.
Range Check Test
Test passes if Vout for the humidity sensor is between 0.33 Volts and 4 Volts.
Test fails if Vout is outside of this range.
Test P5-11 must pass before this test is run.

-----
P6 Tests - Refrigerant Probes, Compressor and Refrigerant Valves: Pass/Fail testing is performed for the
compressor, EEV, DUV, ESV, and the refrigerant pressure and temperature sensors..

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P6−0 Discharge Thermis- If Alarm 64 is active the test fails. Otherwise, the test passes.
tor Test

P6−1 Suction Thermistor If the Suction Temperature Sensor (CPSS) both is configured ON and is in-
Test valid, the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
P6−2 Discharge Pressure If Alarm 65 is active any time during the first 45 second period, the test fails.
Transducer Test Otherwise, the test passes.
P6−3 Suction Pressure If Alarm 66 is active the test fails. Otherwise the test passes.
Transducer Test

P6−4 Compressor Current Compressor current is tested before and 10 seconds after start up. If current
Draw Test does not increase, the test fails. P6-7 is run at the end of P6-4. If this test fails,
P6-6 is skipped.
P6-5 Compressor Leak Pre-trip P6-5 ensures that the compressor holds pressure. After compressor
Test pump up and pump down, the compressor is turned off for 62 seconds. When
suction side pressure holds (less than 8 psi rise) for 10 seconds, P6-5 pass-
es, otherwise the Compressor Leak Test fails.

4–49 T-365 Rev B

 CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

NOTICE
P6-6 through P6-10 are conducted by changing status of each valve and comparing suction
pressure change and/or compressor current change with predetermined values. Tests will
cause compressor and condenser fans to cycle on and off as needed to generate the pressure
required for individual Pre-trip sub tests. The compressor will start in order to build discharge
pressure, followed by compressor pump down sequence. At the conclusion of compressor
pump down sequence, the compressor will shut down and the valve test will start.
P6-6 Economizer Valve Passes if suction pressure increases a minimum of 4 psia when the valve
Test opens for 15 seconds.
P6-7 Digital Loader/Un- Passes if pressure and current changes are within predetermined values 3
loader Valve Test seconds after DLV/DUV switch signal. If it does not pass then refer to Sec-
tion 7.19
P6-10 Electronic Expan- The test records the suction pressure during the open valve position and
sion Valve Test passes if the suction pressure increase is above 3 psi when the valve opens
for 10 seconds.
-----

NOTICE
P7−0 & P8 are included with “Auto2 & Auto3” only. P9−0 through P10 are included with
“Auto2” only.

P7 Tests - High Pressure Tests: Unit is run at full capacity without condenser fan running to make sure that the
HPS opens and closes properly..

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P7−0 High Pressure Switch Test is skipped if sensed ambient temperature is less than 7.2°C (45°F), re-
(HPS) Opening Test turn air temperature is less than -17.8°C (0°F), or the water pressure switch
is open. With the unit running, the condenser fan is turned off and a 900 sec-
ond (15 minute) timer is started. The right display shows Discharge Pressure
if the sensor is configured and valid, else Discharge Temperature. The unit
needs to disable Discharge Pressure limit and enable Current Limit checks.
The test fails immediately if:
-Ambient Temperature Sensor invalid
-Composite Return Temperature Sensor invalid
-HPS is open
The test fails if:
-HPS fails to open before 900 seconds total test time.
-Evaporator or Compressor IP Alarm.
-Calculated Dome Temperature exceeds 137.78°C (280°F).
-Discharge pressure exceeds 370 psig.
-Compressor Current exceeds limits
The test passes if HPS opens within the 15 minute time limit.

T-365 Rev B 4–50

 CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION
P7−1 High Pressure Switch If return temperature greater than -2.4°C, set setpoint to -5.0°C, else set set-
(HPS) Closing Test point to -30°C. Restart unit according to normal startup logic. Run unit nor-
mally for 120 seconds.
The test passes if the high pressure switch closes within 75 seconds after
end of Test 7-0, else the test fails.
Test P7-0 must pass for this test to execute.
-----
P8 Tests - Perishable Mode Tests: Pretrip tests P7-0 and P7-1 must have passed or have been skipped for
these tests to execute. .

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P8−0 Perishable Mode If the control temperature is below 15.6°C., the setpoint is changed to
Test 15.6°C., and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in
the equivalent of normal heating. If the control temperature is above 15.6°C.
at the start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 8-1. While
in test 8-0 the right display will show the value of the control temperature.”
The test fails if the 18°0 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint, the
test proceeds to test 8-1.
P8−1 Perishable Mode Pull Control temperature must be at least 15.6°C (60°F).
Down Test / eAutoF-
The set point is changed to 0°C (32°F), and a 180-minute timer is started.
resh CO2 Sensor
Calibration The left display will read “P8-1,” the right display will show the supply air tem-
perature. The unit will then start to pull down the temperature to the 0C set
point.
The test passes if the container temperature reaches set point before the
180-minute timer expires.
On units where the CO2 Sensor Status indicates that a CO2 sensor is pres-
ent, calibration of the CO2 sensor will be attempted during P8-1. Once P8-1
begins, calibration will be attempted when the supply temperature goes be-
low 5°C. If the CO2 sensor voltage reads within the 0.95 <>1.15Vdc range
before the end of P8-1, the sensor will be calibrated by holding the CO2 zero
line low for 4 seconds. Once calibration is performed, the sensor voltage will
be verified to make sure it is in the 0.95 to 1.05 Vdc range. If the voltage is
not within this range, CO2 sensor calibration fails.
P8−2 Perishable Mode Test P8-1 must pass for P8-2 to execute.
Maintain Tempera- A fifteen minute timer is started, and the system will attempt to minimize con-
ture Test trol temperature error (supply temperature minus setpoint) until the timer ex-
pires. The control temperature will be sampled each minute starting at the
beginning of P8-2.
During P8-2, the left display will read “P8-2,” and the right display will show
the supply air temperature.
When the test is completed, the average control temperature error will be
compared to the pass/fail criteria.
Test passes if the average temperature error is within +/- 1.0°C.
Test fails if the average temperature error is greater than +/- 1.0°C, or if the
DataCORDER supply temperature probe is invalid. If the test fails, the control
probe temperature will be recorded as -50.0°C.

-----

4–51 T-365 Rev B

P9 Test - DTT Close and Open Test: The DTT in this control is not a physical device, with actual metallic con-
tacts, it is a software function that acts similar to a thermostat. Using various temperature inputs, the DTT function
determines whether a thermostat mounted on the Evaporator Coil would have OPEN or CLOSED contacts. Pri-
marily, the DTT function operates based on the temperature reading from the Defrost Termination Sensor.
.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P9−0 DTT Closed and P9-0 DTT Closed and Open Test
Open Test During P9-0 the defrost temperature sensor (DTS) reading will be displayed
on the left display. The right display will show the supply air temperature.
The unit will run FULL COOL for 30 minutes maximum until the DTT is con-
sidered closed. This step may not have to be executed. Once the DTT is con-
sidered closed, the unit simulates defrost by running the heaters for up to two
hours, or until the DTT is considered open.
Test fails if:
The DTT is not considered closed after the 30 minutes of full cooling
HTT opens when DTT is considered closed or if return air temperature ris-
es above 248°C (120°F).
Test passes if the DTT is considered open within the 2 hour heat cycle time
limit.

-----
P10 Tests - Frozen Mode Tests:.

CODE TITLE DESCRIPTION

P10−0 Frozen Mode Heat If the container temperature is below 7.2°C, the setpoint is changed to 7.2°C.,
Test and a 180 Minute timer is started. The control will then be placed in the equiv-
alent of normal heating. If the container temperature is above 7.2°C. at the
start of the test, then the test proceeds immediately to test 10-1. During this
test, the control temperature will be shown on the right display.
The test fails if the 180 Minute timer expires before the control temperature
reaches setpoint - 0.3°C. If the test fails, it will not auto-repeat. There is no
pass display for this test. Once the control temperature reaches setpoint, the
test proceeds to test 10-1.
P10−1 Frozen Mode Pull- Control temperature must be at least 7.2°C (45°F) The setpoint is changed
down Test to -17.8°C. The system will then attempt to pull down the control temperature
to setpoint using normal frozen mode cooling. During this test, the control
temperature will be shown on the right display.
The test passes if the control temperature reaches setpoint minus 0.3°C be-
fore the 180 minute timer expires. Otherwise, the test fails. Upon failure and
when initiated by an automatic Pre-trip sequence, P10-1 will auto-repeat
once by starting P10-0 over again.
P10−2 Frozen Mode Main- Test P10-1 must pass for this test to execute.
tain Temperature Same as for test 8-2 except the control temperature is the return probe tem-
Test perature.
The average error must be +/-1.6°C. If the DataCORDER supply tempera-
ture probe is invalid, the test fails and the control probe temperature will be
recorded as -50°C. Upon failure and when initiated by an automatic Pre-trip
sequence, P10-2 will auto-repeat by starting P10-0 over again.

-----

T-365 Rev B 4–52

 Table 4–8 DataCORDER Function Code Assignments

NOTE:
Inapplicable Functions display “-----”

To Access: Press [Link] key then CODE SELECT key

CODE NO. TITLE DESCRIPTION
dC1 Recorder Supply Current reading of the supply recorder sensor.
Temperature

dC2 Recorder Return Current reading of the return recorder sensor.

Temperature

dC3−5 USDA 1,2,3 Tem- Current readings of the three USDA probes.
peratures

dC6−13 Network Data Points Current values of the network data points (as configured). Data point 1 (Code
1−8 6) is generally the humidity sensor and its value is obtained from the control-
ler once every minute.
dC14 Cargo Probe 4 Tem- Current reading of the cargo probe #4.
perature

dC15−19 Future Expansion These codes are for future expansion, and are not in use at this time.
dC20−24 Temperature Sen- Current calibration offset values for each of the five probes: supply, return,
sors 1−5 Calibration USDA #1, #2, and #3. These values are entered via the interrogation pro-
gram.
dC25 Future Expansion This code is for future expansion, and is not in use at this time.
dC26,27 S/N, Left 4, Right 4 The DataCORDER serial number consists of eight characters. Function code
dC26 contains the first four characters. Function code dC27 contains the last
four characters. (This serial number is the same as the controller
serial number.)
dC28 Minimum Days Left An approximation of the number of logging days remaining until the Data-
CORDER starts to overwrite the existing data.
dC29 Days Stored Number of days of data that are currently stored in the DataCORDER.
dC30 Date of Last Trip start The date when a Trip Start was initiated by the user. In addition, if the system
goes without power for seven continuous days or longer, a trip start will au-
tomatically be generated on the next AC power up. Press and hold “ENTER”
key for five seconds to initiate a “Trip Start.”
dC31 Battery Test Results Shows the current status of the optional battery pack.
PASS: Battery pack is fully charged.
FAIL: Battery pack voltage is low.
dC32 Time: Hour, Minute Current time on the real time clock (RTC) in the DataCORDER.
dC33 Date: Month, Day Current date (month and day) on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC34 Date: Year Current year on the RTC in the DataCORDER.
dC35 Cargo Probe 4 Cali- Current calibration value for the Cargo Probe. This value is an input via the
bration interrogation program.

4–53 T-365 Rev B

 Table 4–9 DataCORDER Pre-Trip Result Records
TEST TITLE DATA
NO.
1-0 Heater On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in current for Phase A, B and C
1-1 Heater Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2-0 Condenser Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Water pressure switch (WPS) − Open/
Closed, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
2−1 Condenser Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3−0 Low Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
3−1 Low Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4−0 High Speed Evaporator Fan On Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
4−1 High Speed Evaporator Fan Off Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Change in currents for Phase A, B and C
5−0 Supply/Return Probe Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, RTS, SRS and RRS
5−1 Secondary Supply Probe (SRS) Test Pass/Fail/Skip
5−2 Secondary Return Probe (RRS) Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−0 Discharge Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−1 Suction Thermistor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−2 Discharge Pressure Sensor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−3 Suction Pressure Sensor Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−4 Compressor Current Draw Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−5 Compressor Leak Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−6 Economizer Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−7 Digital Unloader Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
6−9 Liquid Injection Valve Test (If Pass/Fail/Skip
Equipped)
6-10 Electronic Expansion Valve Test Pass/Fail/Skip
7−0 High Pressure Switch Closed Pass/Fail/Skip Result, AMBS, DPT or CPT (if equipped) Input
values that component opens
7−1 High Pressure Switch Open Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, DPT or CPT (if equipped) Input val-
ues that component closes
8−0 Perishable Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to heat to 16°C (60°F)
8−1 Perishable Mode Pulldown Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time it takes to pull down to 0°C
(32°F)
8−2 Perishable Mode Maintain Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER supply tem-
perature (SRS) over last recording interval.
9−0 Defrost Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, DTS reading at end of test, line voltage,
line frequency, time in defrost.
10−0 Frozen Mode Heat Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time unit is in heat.
10−1 Frozen Mode Pulldown Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, STS, time to pull down unit to -17.8°C
(0°F).
10−2 Frozen Mode Maintain Test Pass/Fail/Skip Result, Averaged DataCORDER return tem-
perature (RRS) over last recording interval.

T-365 Rev B 4–54

.
Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications

To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key

Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION

dAL70 Recorder Supply Temperature The supply recorder sensor reading is outside of the
Out of Range range of −50°C to 70°C (−58°F to +158°F), or the probe
check logic has determined there is a fault with this sen-
sor.

NOTICE
The P5 Pre−trip test must be run to inacti-
vate the alarm.

dAL71 Recorder Return Temperature The return recorder sensor reading is outside of the range
Out of Range of −50°C to 70°C (−58°F to +158°F), or the probe check
logic has determined there is a fault with this sensor.

NOTICE
The P5 Pre−trip test must be run to inacti-
vate the alarm.

dAL72−74 USDA Temperatures 1, 2, 3 Out The USDA probe temperature reading is outside of −50°C
of Range to 70°C (−58°F to +158°F) range.

dAL75 Cargo Probe 4 Out of Range The cargo probe temperature reading is outside of −50°C
to 70°C (−58°F to +158°F) range.

dAL76, 77 Future Expansion These alarms are for future expansion and are not in use
at this time.

dAL78−85 Network Data Point 1 − 8 Out of The network data point is outside of its specified range.
Range The DataCORDER is configured by default to record the
supply and return recorder sensors. The DataCORDER
may be configured to record up to eight additional net-
work data points. An alarm number (AL78 to AL85) is as-
signed to each configured point. When an alarm occurs,
the DataCORDER must be interrogated to identify the
data point assigned. When a humidity sensor is installed,
it is usually assigned to AL78.

dAL86 RTC Battery Low The real time clock (RTC) backup battery is too low to ad-
equately maintain the RTC reading.
A real time clock failure is critical to the operation of the
unit. If this alarm occurs, replace the RTC battery at the
next available opportunity. After replacing the battery the
following actions are required:
• Update the RTC setting
• Update the unit’s software configuration
• Update the operational software
• Update all user selectable function code settings
(defrost, setpoint, etc)

4–55 T-365 Rev B

 Table 4–10 DataCORDER Alarm Indications
To Access: Press ALT. MODE key then ALARM LIST key

Code No. TITLE DESCRIPTION

dAL87 RTC Failure An invalid time has been detected. Either the DataCORD-
ER run time hour and minute have not changed at the
start of the hour, or the real time clock (RTC) time has
gained or lost more than 2 minutes in the hour. This situ-
ation may be corrected by cycling the power, setting the
clock or meeting the above criteria for an hour.

dAL88 DataCORDER EEPROM Failure A write of critical DataCORDER information to the EE-
PROM has failed.

dAL89 Flash Memory Error Error An error has been detected in the process of writing
daily data to the non−volatile FLASH memory.

dAL90 Future Expansion This alarm is for future expansion, and is not in use at this
time.

dAL91 Alarm List Full The DataCORDER alarm queue is determined to be full
(eight alarms).

T-365 Rev B 4–56

 SECTION 5
OPERATION
5.1 INSPECTION (BEFORE LOADING) 5.2 CONNECT POWER

! WARNING ! WARNING
Beware of unannounced starting of the Do not attempt to remove power plug(s)
evaporator and condenser fans. The unit before turning OFF start−stop switch
may cycle the fans and compressor (ST), unit circuit breaker(s) and external
unexpectedly as control requirements power source.
dictate.

1. Check inside for the following:

! WARNING
a. Check channels or “T” bar floor for cleanli-
Make sure the power plugs are clean and
ness. Channels must be free of debris for
dry before connecting to power recepta-
proper air circulation.
cle.
b. Check container panels, insulation and door
seals for damage. Effect permanent or tem- 5.2.1 Connection To 380/460 VAC Power
porary repairs. 1. Make sure start−stop switch (ST on control
c. Visually check evaporator fan motor mount- panel) and circuit breaker (CB−1 in the control
ing bolts for proper securement (refer to Sec- box) are in position “0” (OFF).
tion 7.14). 2. Plug the 460 VAC (yellow) cable into a de−ener-
d. Check for visible corrosion on the evaporator gized 380/460 VAC, 3−phase power source.
stator and fan deck (refer to Section 7.15). Energize the power source. Place circuit breaker
(CB−1) in position “I” (ON). Close and secure
e. Check for dirt or grease on evaporator fans control box door.
or fan deck and clean if necessary.
5.2.2 Connection To 190/230 VAC Power
f. Check evaporator coil for cleanliness or
An autotransformer (Figure 5.1) is required to allow
obstructions. Wash with fresh water (refer to
operation on nominal 230 volt power. It is fitted with a
Section 7.15).
230 VAC cable and a receptacle to accept the standard
g. Check defrost drain pans and drain lines for 460 VAC power plug. The 230 volt cable is black in
obstructions and clear if necessary. Wash color while the 460 volt cable is yellow. The trans-
with fresh water. former may also be equipped with a circuit breaker
(CB−2). The transformer is a step up transformer that
h. Check panels on refrigeration unit for loose will provide 380/460 VAC, 3−phase, 50/60 Hz power to
bolts and condition of panels. Make sure the unit when the 230 VAC power cable is connected to
T.I.R. devices are in place on access panels. a 190/230 VAC, 3−phase power source.
2. Check condenser coil for cleanliness. Wash with 1. Make sure that the start−stop switch (ST, on
fresh water (refer to Section 7.10). control panel) and circuit breakers CB−1 (in the
control box and CB−2 (on the transformer) are in
3. Open control box door. Check for loose electrical
position “0” (OFF). Plug in and lock the 460 VAC
connections or hardware.
power plug at the receptacle on the transformer.
4. Check color of moisture−liquid indicator.
2. Plug the 230 VAC (black) cable into a de−ener-
gized 190/230 VAC, 3−phase power source.
Energize the power source. Set circuit breakers
CB−1 and CB−2 to position “I” (ON). Close and
secure control box door.

5–1 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 5.1 Autotransformer Figure 5.2 Upper Fresh Air Make Up Flow Chart

AIR
460 VAC Power FLOW
Circuit Breaker (CB-2) Receptacle (CMH) 50HZ
230-Volt 250

TBAR
200 1 1/2”

TBAR
2 5/8”
Dual Voltage 150 TBAR 3”
Modular
Autotransformer
100

50

5.3 ADJUST FRESH AIR MAKEUP VENT

0
The purpose of the fresh air makeup vent is to provide 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
ventilation for commodities that require fresh air circu- PERCENT OPEN

lation. The vent must be closed when transporting fro- AIR

FLOW
zen foods. (CMH) 60HZ
Air exchange depends on static pressure differential, 300
which will vary depending on the container and how the
TBAR
container is loaded. 250 1 1/2”

Units may be equipped with a vent position sensor TBAR

200
(VPS). The VPS determines the position of the fresh air 2 5/8”
TBAR 3”
vent (upper or lower, as equipped) and sends data to
150
the controller display.

5.3.1 Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 100

Two slots and a stop are designed into the Upper

50
Fresh Air disc for air flow adjustments. The first slot
allows for a 0 to 30% air flow; the second slot allows for
0
a 30 to 100% air flow. 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
To adjust the percentage of air flow, loosen the wing PERCENT OPEN

nut and rotate the disc until the desired percentage of

air flow matches with the arrow. Tighten the wing nut.
5.3.2 Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent
To clear the gap between the slots, loosen the wing nut
until the disc clears the stop. a. Full Open or Closed Positions
Figure 5.2 gives air exchange values for an empty Maximum air flow is achieved by loosening
container. the wing nuts and moving the cover to the
Higher values can be expected for a fully loaded con- maximum open position (100% position).
tainer. The closed position is 0% air flow position.
The operator may also adjust the opening to
increase or decrease the air flow volume to
meet the required air flow.

b. Reduced Flow for Lower Fresh Air Makeup

NOTICE
In order to prevent inaccurate display
readings on units equipped with a Vent
Position Sensor (VPS), ensure that the
rack and pinion drive of the VPS is not
disrupted when adjusting the air makeup
vent.

T-365 Rev B 5–2

 The position of the vent will be recorded in the Data-
NOTICE CORDER whenever the unit is running under AC
power and any of the following:
Do not loosen the hex nut beyond its Trip start
stop. Doing so may cause inaccurate dis-
On every power cycle
play readings and errors in DataCORDER
reports. Midnight
Manual changes greater than 5 CMH (3 CFM)
Similar to the Upper Fresh Air Makeup vent,
remaining in the new position for at least four
two slots and a stop are designed into the
minutes
Lower Fresh Air slide for air flow adjust-
ments. The first slot allows for a 0 to 25% air
flow; the second slot allows for a 25 to 100%
air flow. To adjust the percentage of air flow,
NOTICE
loosen the hex nut and rotate the disc until The user has four minutes to make nec-
the desired percentage of air flow matches essary adjustments to the vent setting.
with the arrow. Tighten the hex nut. To clear This time calculation begins on the initial
the gap between the slots, loosen the hex movement of the sensor. The vent can be
nut until the disc clears the stop. moved to any position within the four
On some models the air slide is supplied minutes. On completion of the first four
with two adjustable air control discs. The minutes, the vent is required to remain
fresh air makeup can be adjusted for 15, 35, stable for the next four minutes. If vent
50 or 75 cubic meters per hour (CMH). The position changes are detected during the
air flow has been established at 60 Hz four minute stability period, AL50 will be
power and 2−1/2 inch T bar and with 15 mm generated. This provides the user with
(0.6 inch) H 2 O external static above free the ability to change the vent setting
blow. without generating multiple events in the
DataCORDER.
Loosen the hex nut, adjust each disc to the
required air flow, then tighten hex nut. 5.4 eAutoFresh OPERATION
The eAutoFresh system allows the opening and clos-
NOTICE ing of the mechanical air vent slide. The opening and
closing of the slide is determined by the mode selected
The main air slide is in the fully closed through Cd43.
position during reduced air flow opera-
tion when equipped with air control The modes of operation are OFF, USER, TEST,
discs. DELAY, and GASLIMIT. Each mode of operation has
submenus with selectable parameters. Not all parame-
c. Air Sampling for Carbon Dioxide (CO2) ters are available in each submenu.
Level Loosen hex nuts and move the cover Upon power up, the controller will fully close the eAut-
until the arrow on the cover is aligned with oFresh air vent. Nine seconds after power up, the con-
the “atmosphere sampling port” label. troller will check if there is a carbon dioxide (CO 2 )
Tighten the hex nuts and attach a 3/8 in. sensor connected. When a CO2 sensor is detected, the
hose to the sampling port. controller will enable access to the Gas Limit mode of
If the internal atmosphere content has operation. If no sensor is detected, the only modes of
reached an unacceptable level, the operator operation available will be Test, User, and Delay. The
may adjust the disc opening to meet the controller will then resume operation in the last mode of
required air flow volume to ventilate the con- operation before power interruption.
tainer.
5.4.1 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection
5.3.3 Vent Position Sensor Pre−trip testing of the eAutoFresh system is performed
The VPS allows the user to determine the position of during Pre−Trip test P0. Operation of the system may
the fresh air vent via Cd45. This function code is acces- be observed during this test.
sible via the Code Select key. Upon initiation of Pre−Trip P0, the current state will be
The vent position will display for 30 seconds whenever saved and the vent will fully close. This will be followed
motion corresponding to 5 CMH (3 CFM) or greater is by two sequences of opening to 100% and returning to
detected. It will scroll in intervals of 5 CMH (3 CFM). the closed position. No other eAutoFresh mode of
Scrolling to Cd45 will display the Fresh Air Vent Posi- operation will be available until the two cycles of open-
tion.

5–3 T-365 Rev B

ing and closing have completed. Upon termination of tESt − When “tESt” appears in the left win-
the test, the vent will open to the previous state and dow, press the ENTER key to begin the test.
operation will return to the previous mode. The eAutoFresh slide will open fully and
If the last mode was gASLM, the vent will open to the then return to the closed position. The test
preset FLO setting, the controller will start taking new may be observed by the operator to ensure
readings and control based on those readings. proper operation of the vent. After comple-
tion of the TEST, the unit will return to the
5.4.2 eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure previous mode of operation.
To start the system, do the following:

1. Press the “CODE SELECT” key (see Figure NOTICE

4.2). It is recommended that the calibration
2. Press the “UP or DOWN” arrow key until “Cd43” procedure only be performed during
is displayed, then press “ENTER”. Pre−trip or when the container has been
fully vented.
3. Press the “UP or DOWN“ arrow key to access
the desired mode of operation. When the mode CAL will attempt to calibrate the CO2 sensor.
operation is displayed press the enter key to When “CAL“ is selected the display will flash
access the submenu parameters. “CAL“. The operator is to hold the “ENTER“
key for 5 seconds. The display will stop
5.4.3 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation flashing and read “CAL“ for 5 seconds. The
microprocessor will read the CO2 value, and
then compare that value to a known zero
NOTICE value. If the sensor is within the calibration
parameter range, the microprocessor will
When setting any mode of operation, determine the appropriate offset for the sen-
complete the entire process to ensure all sor. If the sensor is outside of this range, for
parameters are set. example if the container is loaded or has a
a. OFF high level of CO 2 , the controller will flash
“NOCAL“ for 5 seconds then revert to the
A setting of OFF will disable all automatic previous mode of operation.
venting operations. The eAutoFresh vent will
be driven fully closed and the eAutoFresh d. DELAY
opening set to 0 CMH in Cd44. This is the In DELAY mode, the operation of the eAut-
default mode whenever a frozen mode of oFresh system will be delayed for a set
operation has been selected. When the fro- amount of time. This allows time for the
zen set point is selected, the current eAut- cargo to reach set point. In DELAY mode,
oFresh setting is saved. The vent position the eAutoFresh vent will open to the stored
will be restored when a perishable set point (FLO) value when the return air temperature
is selected. sensor (RTS) is at or below set point plus
b. USER the return offset value (rtn) or the delay time
(tIM), whichever comes first. The eAutoF-
The USER mode provides ventilation for resh vent will be fully closed when return air
commodities that require fresh air circula- temperature is greater than the set point
tion. The flow rate can be accessed plus the offset temperature (rtn).
through the submenu if a perishable set
point has been selected. To set the flow To set the unit in Delay mode, scroll until
rate, press the ENTER key to activate the “DELAY“ appears in the left window, press
selection mode. When FLO appears in ENTER to activate the submenu. The first
the left hand window, use the UP or selection is the amount of time (tIM) for the
DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired delay. Select the amount of time for the
opening. The range is from 0 to 220CM (0 delay by using the UP and DOWN arrow
to 129CF) in increments of 5. Press the keys. The range is from 1 to 72 hours in 1
ENTER key to set the value and begin hour increments. Press the ENTER key to
operation. set the value and move to the FLO rate. Use
the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll to the
c. TEST desired FLO rate.
TEST mode allows the operator to test the The range is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF)
movement of the mechanical slide air vent in increments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press
and calibrate the CO2 sensor. the ENTER key to set the value and move to

T-365 Rev B 5–4

 the return temperature offset. Use the UP or tIM is the time delay prior to the door open-
DOWN arrow key to scroll to the desired rtn ing. The time range is from 1 to 72 hrs in 1 hr
rate. The range of offset is from 0.6C to 2.8C increments.
(1.0F to 2.8F) in 0.1 increments. Press CO2LM is the maximum level of CO2 that is
ENTER to set the value and begin opera- allowed for the cargo. The range is from 0%
tion. to 19% in 1% increments, the default setting
e. GAS LIMIT (gASLM) is 10.

In GAS LIMIT mode, access to the submenu O2LM is the minimum level of O 2 that is
is available provided a perishable set point allowed for the cargo. The range is from 2%
has been selected, and a valid reading is to 20% in 1% increments, the default setting
detected from the CO2 sensor. In “Gas limit” is 10.
mode the microprocessor will monitor and Rtn is an offset value used to expand the
limit the level of CO 2 in the container by return air temperature value to compensate
opening and closing the eAutoFresh vent. for the fresh air entering the container. The
The vent will open to the (FLO) setting once allowable range is from 0.6°C to 2.8°C or
the unit has completed initial temperature 1.0°F to 5.0°F in 0.1 increments the default
pull down or if the cargo temperature is setting is 2.8°C (5°F).
within 5C of set point and the CO2 level has
reached the max limit or if the O2 level has 5.5 CONNECT REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTA-
reached the lower limit. After the first 15 min- CLE
utes of the vent opening the controller will
If remote monitoring is required, connect the remote
again evaluate the level of CO2, and/or O2
monitor plug at the unit receptacle, see Figure 3.5.
levels. If after the first 15 minutes the gas
When the remote monitor plug is connected to the
limit values are satisfied, the vent will close,
remote monitoring receptacle, the following remote cir-
if either gas limit has not been satisfied
cuits are energized:
within 15 minutes the air exchange vent will
open in 10 CMH increments every 15 min- CIRCUIT FUNCTION
utes until both gas concentrations are satis-
fied. Once all limits are satisfied the vent will Sockets B to A Energizes remote cool light
return to the closed position. If conditions
are not met with the slide open 100% for 90 Sockets C to A Energizes remote defrost light
minutes AL29 will be activated. Sockets D to A Energizes remote in−range light
To operate in GAS LIMIT mode, scroll until
gASLM appears in the left window, and 5.6 STARTING AND STOPPING INSTRUCTIONS
press ENTER to activate the submenu. The
first selection is the maximum CO 2 level
(CO2LM). Select the maximum CO2 level by
using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. The
! WARNING
range is from 0 to 19% in 1% increments. Make sure that the unit circuit breaker(s)
Press ENTER to set the value and move to (CB−1 & CB−2) and the START−STOP
the minimum O2 level (O2LM). The range is switch (ST) are in the “O” (OFF) position
from 2% to 20% in 1% increments. Press before connecting to any electrical power
ENTER to set the value and move to the source.
FLO rate. Use the UP or DOWN arrow key
to scroll to the desired FLO rate. The range
is from 0 to 220CM (0 to 129CF) in incre- NOTICE
ments of 5 and 3 respectively. Press ENTER
to set the value and begin operation. The electronic phase detection system
will check for proper compressor rotation
Operational Parameters (Sub Menu Options): within the first 30 seconds. If rotation is
not correct, the compressor will be
FLO indicates the opening to which the slide
stopped and restarted in the opposite
will move based on the stored value in CMH
direction. If the compressor is producing
(in increments of 5) or CFM depending on
unusually loud and continuous noise
the selection of Cd46 (Airflow display units),
after the first 30 seconds of operation,
Cd28 (Metric/Imperial) or the pressing of the
stop the unit and investigate.
deg C/F key. CFM is displayed as CF, CMH
is displayed as CM.

5–5 T-365 Rev B

5.6.1 Starting the Unit

1. With power properly applied, the fresh air vent in ! CAUTION

proper position, place the START−STOP switch
When Pre−trip key is pressed, economy,
to “I” (ON), see Figure 3.5.
dehumidification and bulb mode will be
2. The Controller Function Codes for the container deactivated. At the completion of Pre−trip
ID (Cd40), software version (Cd18) and unit activity, economy, dehumidification and
model number (Cd20) will be displayed in bulb mode must be reactivated.
sequence.
Pre−trip diagnosis provides automatic testing of the
3. Continue with Start Up Inspection, Section 5.7. unit components using internal measurements and
comparison logic. The program will provide a “PASS”
5.6.2 Stopping the Unit or “FAIL” display to indicate test results.
To stop the unit, place the START−STOP switch in The testing begins with access to a Pre−trip selection
position “0” (OFF). menu. The user may have the option of selecting one
of two automatic tests.
5.7 START−UP INSPECTION These tests will automatically perform a series of indi-
vidual Pre−trip tests. The user may also scroll down to
5.7.1 Physical Inspection select any of the individual tests.
Check rotation of condenser and evaporator fans. When only the short sequence is configured, it will
appear as “AUtO” in the display. Otherwise “AUtO1”
5.7.2 Check Controller Function Codes will indicate the short sequence and “AUtO2” will indi-
Check, and if required, reset controller Function Codes cate the long sequence. The test short sequence will
(Cd27 through Cd39) in accordance with desired oper- run tests P0 through P6. The long test sequence will
ating parameters. Refer to Table 4–5. run tests P0 through P10.
A detailed description of the Pre−trip test codes is
5.7.3 Start Temperature Recorder DataCORDER
listed in Table 4–7. If no selection is made, the Pre−trip
1. Check and, if required, set the DataCORDER menu selection process will terminate automatically.
Configuration in accordance with desired record- However, dehumidification and bulb mode must be
ing parameter. Refer to Section 4.8.3. reactivated manually if required.
Scrolling down to the “rSLts” code and pressing
2. Enter a “Trip Start.” To enter a “Trip Start,” do ENTER will allow the user to scroll through the results
the following: of the last Pre−trip testing run. If no Pre−testing has
a. Depress the ALT MODE key. When the left been run (or an individual test has not been run) since
display shows, dC, depress the ENTER key. the unit was powered up, “−−−−” will be displayed.
To start a Pre−trip test, do the following:
b. Scroll to Code dC30.

c. Depress and hold the ENTER key for five

seconds.
NOTICE
1. Prior to starting a Pre−trip test, verify
d. The “Trip Start” event will be entered in the
that unit voltage (Cd07) is within toler-
Data-CORDER.
ance and unit amperage draw (Cd04,
5.7.4 Complete Inspection Cd05, Cd06) are within expected limits.
Otherwise, tests may fail incorrectly.
Allow the unit to run for five minutes to stabilize condi-
tions, and then perform a Pre−trip diagnosis in accor- 2. All alarms must be rectified and
dance with Section 4.7. cleared before starting tests.

5.8 PRE−TRIP DIAGNOSIS 3. Pre−trip may also be initiated via com-

munications. The operation is the same
as for the keypad initiation described
! CAUTION below except that should a test fail, the
Pre−trip inspection should not be per- Pre−trip mode will automatically termi-
formed with critical temperature cargoes nate. When initiated via communications,
in the container. a Pre−trip test may not be interrupted
with an arrow key, but the Pre−trip test
can be terminated with the PRE−TRIP
key.

T-365 Rev B 5–6

 1. Press the PRE−TRIP key to accesses the ponent. At the conclusion, PASS or FAIL will
Pre−trip test selection menu. be displayed. This message will remain dis-
played for up to three minutes, during which
2. TO RUN AN AUTOMATIC TEST: Scroll through time a user may select another test. If the
the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or three minute time period expires, the unit will
DOWN ARROW keys to display AUTO, AUTO 1, terminate pre−trip and return to control mode
AUTO 2 or AUTO 3 as desired, then press operation.
ENTER.
b. While the tests are being executed, the user
a. The unit will execute the series of tests with- may terminate the pre−trip diagnostics by
out any need for direct user interface. These pressing and holding the PRE−TRIP key. The
tests vary in length, depending on the com- unit will then resume normal operation. If the
ponent under test. user decides to terminate a test but remain at
b. While tests are running, “P#−#” will appear the test selection menu, the user may press
on the left display; the #’s indicate the test the UP ARROW key. When this is done, all
number and sub−test. The right display will test outputs will be de−energized and the test
show a countdown time in minutes and sec- selection menu will be displayed.
onds, indicating the amount of time remain- c. During Pre−trip testing, current limiting and
ing in the test. pressure limiting are both active, except
during P−7 (High Pressure Switch Testing)
when pressure limiting is turned off.
! CAUTION
4. Pre−Trip Test Results
When a failure occurs during automatic
testing, the unit will suspend operation At the end of the pre−trip test selection menu,
awaiting operator intervention. the message “P,” “rSLts” (Pre−trip results) will
be displayed.
When an automatic test fails, it will be repeated once. A
Pressing the ENTER key will allow the user to
repeated test failure will cause “FAIL” to be shown on
see the results for all sub-tests (i.e., 1−0, 1−1,
the right display, with the corresponding test number to
etc).
the left.
The user may then press the DOWN ARROW to repeat The results will be displayed as “PASS” or
the test, the UP ARROW to skip to the next test, or the “FAIL” for all the tests run to completion since
PRE−TRIP key to terminate testing. The unit will wait power up. If a test has not been run since
indefinitely or until the user manually enters a com- power up, “-----” will be displayed.
mand. Once all Pre-test activity is completed, dehu-
midification and bulb mode must be reacti-
vated manually if required.
! CAUTION
5.9 PROBE DIAGNOSTICS
When Pre−trip test Auto2 runs to comple-
tion without being interrupted, the unit A complete temperature probe check is performed
will terminate Pre−trip and display “Auto during the P5 Pre−trip test. A probe check is also run at
2” “end.” The unit will suspend operation the end of a defrost cycle; the defrost light will remain
until the user depresses the ENTER key! on during this period. If supply probes are within limits
and return probes are within limits, the unit will return to
When an Auto 1 Pre−trip test runs to completion with- normal operation. During normal operation, the control-
out a failure, the unit will exit Pre−trip mode and return ler continuously monitors and compares adjacent tem-
to normal control operation. However, dehumidification perature probe readings.
and bulb mode must be reactivated manually if
The probe check procedure consists of running the
required.
evaporator fans for up to eight minutes in order to com-
3. TO RUN AN INDIVIDUAL TEST: Scroll through pare the readings from the adjacent temperature
the selections by pressing the UP ARROW or probes. If a significant difference in temperature read-
DOWN ARROW keys to display an individual ings is detected between probes, a defrost cycle, fol-
test code. Pressing ENTER when the desired lowed by another probe check may be initiated. Any
test code is displayed. continued disagreement between probes will prompt
the controller to invalidate the failed temperature
a. Individually selected tests, other than the probe, and the backup probe will be used for tempera-
LED/Display test, will perform the operations ture control.
necessary to verify the operation of the com-

5–7 T-365 Rev B

In Perishable Mode, both pairs of supply and return In the Case of Probe Disagreement:
probes are monitored for probe disagreement. Probe If the supply probes disagree and the return probes
disagreement is considered a difference of 0.5°C agree, the controller will invalidate the worst supply
(0.9°F) or greater between the supply air sensors and/ probe. If the probe check is run as part of Pre−trip P−5,
or a difference of 2.0°C (3.6°F) between the return air an alarm will be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it
sensors. Probe disagreement found in either pair can is a run time defrost probe check, the invalidated probe
trigger a defrost probe check. will be passed over and no alarm will be triggered.
In Frozen Mode, only the controlling probes are consid- However, if the best supply probe is greater than 1.2°C
ered. Disagreement of the controlling probes can trig- (2.2°F) difference with respect to its return probes, the
ger a defrost probe check, which will occur when the best supply probe is also invalidated. If unit is in Perish-
difference between the sensors is greater than 2.0°C able Mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both sup-
(3.6°F). Normally, the controlling probes are the return ply probes.
probes but if both return probes are invalidated, the If the supply probes agree and the return probes dis-
supply probes are used for control purposes. Probe agree, invalidate the worst return probe. If the probe
disagreement of the non−controlling probe pair will not check is being run as part of Pre−trip P−5, an alarm will
trigger a defrost probe check. be triggered for the invalidated probe. If it is a run time
If after the defrost probe check the supply probes defrost probe check, the invalidated probe will be
agree and return probes agree, all supply and return passed over and no alarm will be necessary. If the best
sensors are considered valid and the unit returns to return probe is greater than 1.2°C (2.2°F) difference
normal control. with respect to its supply probes, then the best return
probe is also invalidated. If the unit is in perishable
mode, a probe alarm will be triggered for both return
probes.

T-365 Rev B 5–8

 SECTION 6
TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 UNIT WILL NOT START OR STARTS THEN STOPS

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

External power source OFF Turn On

Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check

No power to unit
Circuit breaker tripped or OFF Check

Autotransformer not connected Section 5.2.2

Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check

Control transformer defective Replace

Loss of control power
Fuse (F3A/F3B) blown Check

Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check

Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.14

Condenser fan motor internal protector open Section 7.8

Compressor internal protector open Section 7.8

Component(s) not operating
High pressure switch open Section 6.7

Heat termination thermostat open Replace

Malfunction of current sensor Replace

6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Hot load Normal

Container
Defective box insulation or air leak Repair

6–1 T-365 Rev B

6.2 UNIT OPERATES LONG OR CONTINUOUSLY IN COOLING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section
Shortage of refrigerant Section 7.3

Evaporator coil covered with ice Section 6.6

Evaporator coil plugged with debris Section 7.13

Air bypass around evaporator coil Check

Controller set too low Reset

Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par- Open valves
Refrigeration system tially closed completely

Dirty condenser Section 7.10.1

Compressor worn Section 7.8

Current limit (function code Cd32) set to wrong value Section 4.4.3

Economizer solenoid valve malfunction Section 7.17

Digital unloader valve stuck open Section 7.21.1

Electronic expansion valve Section 7.16.1

6.3 UNIT RUNS BUT HAS INSUFFICIENT COOLING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Abnormal pressures Section 6.7

Abnormal temperatures Section 6.15

Abnormal currents Section 6.16

Controller malfunction Section 6.9

Evaporator fan or motor defective Section 7.14

Refrigeration system
Compressor service valves or liquid line shutoff valve par- Open valves
tially closed completely

Frost on coil Section 6.10

Digital unloader valve stuck open Section 7.21.1

Electronic expansion valve Section 7.16.1

6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Start−Stop switch OFF or defective Check

No operation of any kind Circuit breaker OFF or defective Check

External power source OFF Turn ON

T-365 Rev B 6–2

6.4 UNIT WILL NOT HEAT OR HAS INSUFFICIENT HEATING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section
Circuit breaker or fuse defective Replace

Control Transformer defective Replace

No control power Evaporator fan internal motor protector open Section 7.14

Heat relay defective Check

Heater termination thermostat open Section 7.13

Heater(s) defective Section 7.13

Heater contactor or coil defective Replace

Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or running backwards Section 7.13/

Section 7.14
Unit will not heat or has insuffi- Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
cient heat
Controller malfunction Section 6.9

Defective wiring Replace

Loose terminal connections Tighten

Low line voltage Section 3.3

6.5 UNIT WILL NOT TERMINATE HEATING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Controller improperly set Reset

Controller malfunction Section 6.9

Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along with Section 7.13
the heat relay

6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Defrost timer malfunction (Cd27) Section Table

4–5

Loose terminal connections Tighten

Will not initiate defrost automati-
Defective wiring Replace
cally
Defrost temperature sensor defective or heat termination Replace
thermostat open

Heater contactor or coil defective Replace

Keypad is defective Replace

Will not initiate defrost manually
Defrost temperature sensor open Replace

6–3 T-365 Rev B

6.6 UNIT WILL NOT DEFROST PROPERLY

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section
Initiates but relay (DR) drops out Low Line Voltage Section 3.3

Heater contactor or coil defective Replace

Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out Section 7.13

6.7 ABNORMAL PRESSURES

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Condenser coil dirty Section 7.10.1

Condenser fan rotating backwards Section 7.10

Condenser fan inoperative Section 7.11

High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3

Discharge service valve partially closed Open

Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Replace

Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check

Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace

pressure transducer (EPT)

Suction service valve partially closed Open

Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.12

Low suction pressure Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3

No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.13

Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6

Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.14.3

EEV control malfunction Replace

Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace

Suction and discharge pressures Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.14

tend to equalize when unit is oper-
ating Compressor cycling/stopped Check

Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace

T-365 Rev B 6–4

6.8 ABNORMAL NOISE OR VIBRATIONS

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Compressor start up after an extended shutdown

Normal
Brief chattering when manually shut down

Compressor operating in reverse Section 6.14

Compressor
Loose mounting bolts or worn resilient mounts Tighten/Replace

Loose upper mounting Section 7.8.1

Liquid slugging Section 7.13

Bent, loose or striking venturi Check

Worn motor bearings Section 7.11/

Condenser or Evaporator Fan Section 7.14

Bent motor shaft Section 7.11/

Section 7.14

6.9 MICROPROCESSOR MALFUNCTION

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check

Defective sensor Section 7.24

Will not control
Defective wiring Check

Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3

6.10 NO EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW OR RESTRICTED AIR FLOW

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Frost on coil Section 6.6

Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil Section 7.13

Evaporator fan motor internal protector open Section 7.14

Evaporator fan motor(s) defective Section 7.14

No or partial evaporator air flow
Evaporator fan(s) loose or defective Section 7.14

Evaporator fan contactor defective Replace

6–5 T-365 Rev B

6.11 EAUTOFRESH NOT OPERATING

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action

Cd43 in Off mode Section 5.4.2

Wiring disconnected Check wiring

Vent not opening
Stepper drive defective Section 7.27.2

Stepper motor defective Section 7.27.4

Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4.3

Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3

Gas Limit mode unavailable Wiring disconnected Check wiring

Unit operating in frozen mode Section 5.4.3

“Enter” Key not held for sufficient length of time Section 5.4.3

Unable to calibrate CO2 sensor CO2 outside of acceptable levels Check

Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3

Unit not Configured for eAutoFresh Operation No action

Code 44 displays “-----”
Check CO2 sensor Section 5.4.3

6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Incorrect software and/or controller configuration Check

Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace

pressure transducer (EPT)

Suction service valve partially closed Open

Filter drier partially plugged Section 7.12

Low refrigerant charge Section 7.3

Low suction pressure
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow Section 7.8

Excessive frost on evaporator coil Section 6.6

Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards Section 7.14.3

EEV control malfunction Section 7.16

Failed digital unloader valve (DUV) Replace

Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace

T-365 Rev B 6–6

6.12 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE MALFUNCTION

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section
Foreign material in valve Section 7.16

Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace

pressure transducer (EPT)
High suction pressure with low su-
perheat EEV control malfunction Replace

Improperly seated powerhead Ensure power-

head is locked
and in place

Liquid slugging in compressor Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace
pressure transducer (EPT)

Failed EEV Replace

6.13 AUTOTRANSFORMER MALFUNCTION

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Unit will not start Circuit breaker (CB−1 or CB−2) tripped Check

Autotransformer defective Section 7.23

Power source not turned ON Check

460 VAC power plug is not inserted into the receptacle Section 5.2.1

6.14 COMPRESSOR OPERATING IN REVERSE

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

NOTICE
The compressor may start in reverse for up to 10 seconds to determine correct phase rotation
if required for phase detection.

! CAUTION
Allowing the scroll compressor to operate in reverse for more than two minutes will result in
internal compressor damage. Turn the start−stop switch OFF immediately.

Incorrect wiring of compressor

Electrical Incorrect wiring of compressor contactor(s) Check

Incorrect wiring of current sensor

6–7 T-365 Rev B

6.15 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURES

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Gas Cooler coil dirty Section 7.10.1

Gas Cooler fan rotating backwards Section 7.11

Gas Cooler fan inoperative Section 7.11.1

Refrigerant overcharge or non-condensibles Section 7.3

Discharge service valve partially closed Open

Electronic expansion valve (EEV) control malfunction Section 7.16.1

High discharge temperature Failed suction pressure transducer (SPT) or evaporator Replace
pressure transducer (EPT)

Discharge temperature sensor drifting high Replace

Failed economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, or Replace

economizer solenoid valve

Plugged economizer expansion valve, economizer coil, or Replace

economizer solenoid valve

Loose or insufficiently clamped sensor Replace

6.16 ABNORMAL CURRENTS

Condition Possible Cause Remedy/Refer-

ence Section

Unit reads abnormal currents Current sensor wiring Check

T-365 Rev B 6–8

 SECTION 7
SERVICE

NOTICE Never use air or gas mixtures containing

oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating
Use a refrigerant recovery system when- the product.
ever removing refrigerant. When working
with refrigerants you must comply with Charge only with R−134a: Refrigerant
all local government environmental laws. must conform to AHRI Standard 700
In the U.S.A., refer to EPA section 608. specification.

7.1 SECTION LAYOUT

! WARNING Service procedures are provided herein beginning with
EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow refrigeration system service, then refrigeration system
this WARNING can result in death, seri- component service, electrical system service, tempera-
ous personal injury and / or property ture recorder service and general service. Refer to the
damage. Table of Contents to locate specific topics.

Figure 7.1 Manifold Gauge Set

Suction Pressure Discharge Pressure

Gauge Gauge

Discharge Pressure
Utility Connection to:
Valve Low Side Suction Pressure
A. Refrigerant cylinder
(shown backseated) High Side Connection Valve
B. Vacuum Pump
Connection (shown frontseated)
C. Oil Container

7.2 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET gauge/hose set is available from Carrier Transicold.
(Carrier Transicold part number 07-00294-00, which
The manifold gauge set (see Figure 7.1) is used to
includes items 1 through 6, Figure 7.2.)
determine system operating pressure, add refrigerant
charge, and to equalize or evacuate the system. If the manifold gauge/hose set is new or was exposed
to the atmosphere, it will need to be evacuated to
When the Suction Pressure Valve is frontseated
remove contaminants and air as follows:
(turned all the way in), the suction (low) pressure can
be checked at the Suction Pressure Gauge. 1. Backseat (turn counterclockwise) both field ser-
When the Discharge Pressure Valve is frontseated, the vice couplings (see Figure 7.2) and midseat
discharge (high) pressure can be checked at the Dis- both hand valves.
charge Pressure Gauge.
2. Connect the yellow hose to a vacuum pump and
When both valves are backseated (all the way out), refrigerant 134a cylinder.
high pressure vapor will flow into the low side.
When the Suction Pressure Valve is open and the Dis- 3. Evacuate to 10 inches of vacuum and then
charge Pressure Valve shut, the system can be charge with R-134a to a slightly positive pres-
charged through the Utility Connection. Oil can also be sure of 0.1 kg/cm2 (1.0 psig).
added to the system.
4. Frontseat both manifold gauge set valves and
A R-134a manifold gauge/hose set with self-sealing disconnect from cylinder. The gauge set is now
hoses (see Figure 7.2) is required for service of the ready for use.
models covered within this manual. The manifold

7–1 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 7.2 Manifold Gauge/Hose Set Figure 7.3 Service Valve

2
1 3

4
To Low Side To High Side 6 7
Access Valve 1 Access Valve 5
2
6

1. Line Connection 5. Compressor of Fil-

2. Access Valve ter Drier Inlet Con-
3 nection
4 3. Stem Cap
4 6. Valve (Frontseated)
7 4. Valve Stem
2 5 7. Valve (Backseated)
-----

1. RED Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose Connection of the manifold gauge/hose set (see Fig-
(SAE J2196/R-134a) ure 7.4) is dependent on the component being ser-
2. Hose Fitting (0.5-16 Acme) viced. If only the compressor is being serviced, the
3. YELLOW Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose high side coupling is connected to the discharge ser-
(SAE J2196/R-134a) vice valve.
4. Hose Fitting with O-ring (M14 x 1.5) For service of the low side (after pump down), the high
5. High Side Field Service Coupling (Red Knob) side coupling is connected to the liquid line service
6. BLUE Refrigeration and/or Evacuation Hose valve. The center hose connection is brought to the
(SAE J2196/R-134a) tool being used (vacuum, tank, etc.).
7. Low Side Field Service Coupling (Blue Knob) Connecting the manifold gauge set:
-----
1. Remove service valve stem cap and to make
7.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS sure the valve is backseated.

The compressor suction, compressor discharge, and 2. Remove access valve cap (See Figure 7.3).
the liquid line service valves (see Figure 7.3) are pro-
3. Connect the field service coupling (see Figure
vided with a double seat and an access valve which
7.2) to the access valve.
enables servicing of the compressor and refrigerant
lines. 4. Turn the field service coupling knob clockwise,
Turning the valve stem clockwise (all the way forward) which will open the system to the gauge set.
will frontseat the valve to close off the line connection
5. To read system pressures, slightly midseat the
and open a path to the access valve. Turning the stem
service valve.
counterclockwise (all the way out) will backseat the
valve to open the line connection and close off the path 6. Repeat the procedure to connect the other side
to the access valve. of the gauge set.
With the valve stem midway between frontseat and
backseat, both of the service valve connections are
open to the access valve path. ! CAUTION
For example, the valve stem is first fully backseated To prevent trapping liquid refrigerant in
when connecting a manifold gauge to measure pres- the manifold gauge set be sure set is
sure. Then, the valve is opened 1/4 to 1/2 turn to mea- brought to suction pressure before dis-
sure the pressure. connecting.

T-365 Rev B 7–2

Removing the Manifold Gauge Set: 5. Frontseat the suction and discharge service
valves. The refrigerant will be trapped between
1. While the compressor is still ON, backseat the the compressor discharge service valves and
high side service valve. the liquid line valve.
2. Midseat both hand valves on the manifold gauge 6. Before opening up any part of the system, a
set and allow the pressure in the manifold gauge slight positive pressure should be indicated on
set to be drawn down to low side pressure. This the pressure gauge. Remove power from the
returns any liquid that may be in the high side unit before opening any part of the system. If a
hose to the system. vacuum is indicated, emit refrigerant by cracking
3. Backseat the low side service valve. Backseat the liquid line valve momentarily to build up a
both field service couplings and frontseat both slight positive pressure.
manifold hand valves. Remove couplings from 7. When opening up the refrigerant system, certain
access valves. parts may frost. Allow the part to warm to ambi-
4. Install both service valve stem caps and service ent temperature before dismantling. This avoids
port caps (finger-tight only). internal condensation which puts moisture in the
system.
7.4 PUMP DOWN THE UNIT 8. After repairs have been made, be sure to per-
To service the filter drier, economizer, expansion form a refrigerant leak check (refer to Section
valves, economizer solenoid valve, digital loader valve, 7.5), and evacuate and dehydrate the low side
digital unloader valve or evaporator coil, pump the (refer to Section 7.6.1).
refrigerant into the high side as follows:
9. Check refrigerant charge (refer to Section 7.7).

! CAUTION 7.5 REFRIGERANT LEAK CHECKING

The scroll compressor achieves low suc-

tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the ! WARNING
compressor to evacuate the system
below 0 psig. Never operate the compres- EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow
sor with the suction or discharge service this WARNING can result in death, seri-
valves closed (frontseated). Internal dam- ous personal injury and / or property
age will result from operating the com- damage.
pressor in a deep vacuum.
Never use air or gas mixtures containing
Automatic Pump Down: oxygen (O2) for leak testing or operating
the product.
To perform an Automatic Pump Down using Cd59
Pump Down Logic, refer to Table 4–5 Controller Func- Charge only with R−134a: Refrigerant
tion Codes. must conform to AHRI Standard 700
specification.
Manual Pump Down:
1. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in
1. Attach manifold gauge set to the compressor a system is with a R-134a electronic leak detec-
suction and discharge service valves. Refer to tor. Testing joints with soapsuds is satisfactory
paragraph 6.2. only for locating large leaks.
2. Start the unit and run in the frozen mode (con- 2. If the system is without refrigerant, charge the
troller set below -10C (14F) for 10 to 15 minutes. system with refrigerant 134a to build up pressure
3. Check function code Cd21 (refer to Section between 2.1 to 3.5 bar (30.5 to 50.8 psig). To
4.2.2). The economizer solenoid valve should be ensure complete pressurization of the system,
open. If not, continue to run until the valve refrigerant should be charged at the compressor
opens. suction valve and the liquid line service valve.
Remove refrigerant cylinder and leak-check all
4. Frontseat the liquid line service valve. Place connections.
Start-Stop switch in the OFF position when the
suction reaches a positive pressure of 0.1 bar
(1.4 psig).

7–3 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 7.4 Refrig. System Service Connections
NOTICE 12 13
2 3
Only refrigerant 134a should be used to
pressurize the system. Any other gas or
1 5
vapor will contaminate the system, which
will require additional purging and evacu-
ation of the system.

3. If required, remove refrigerant using a refrigerant

recovery system and repair any leaks. Check for 4
leaks.
6
4. Evacuate and dehydrate the unit. (Refer to Sec- S D
tion 7.6.) 11
9
5. Charge unit per Section 7.7.1.
7
7.6 EVACUATION AND DEHYDRATION
10
7.6.1 General 8
Moisture is detrimental to refrigeration systems. The
presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can 1. Liquid Service Con- 7. Vacuum Pump
have many undesirable effects. The most common are nection 8. Electronic Vacuum
copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freezing-up” of 2. Economizer Sole- Gauge
metering devices by free water, and formation of acids, noid Valve 9. Manifold Gauge Set
resulting in metal corrosion. 3. Receiver or Water 10. Refrigerant Cylinder
Cooled Condenser 11. Reclaimer
7.6.2 Preparation 4. Compressor 12. Discharge Loader
5. Discharge Service Valve
1. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak Connection
test (refer to Section 7.5). 13. Discharge Unloader
6. Suction Service Valve
2. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehy- Connection
drate any system include a vacuum pump (8 m3/ -----
hr = 5 cfm volume displacement) and an elec- 7.6.3 Complete System
tronic vacuum gauge. The pump is available
from Carrier Transicold, P/N 07-00176-11. The
magnet is P/N 07−00512−00. The micron gauge NOTICE
is P/N 07−00414−00.
Refer to Partial System procedure for
3. If possible, keep the ambient temperature above information pertaining to partial system
15.6°C (60°F) to speed evaporation of moisture. evacuation and dehydration.
If the ambient temperature is lower than 15.6°C
(60°F), ice might form before moisture removal 1. Remove all refrigerant using a refrigerant recov-
is complete. Heat lamps or alternate sources of ery system.
heat may be used to raise the system tempera-
2. The recommended method to evacuate and
ture.
dehydrate the system is to connect evacuation
4. Additional time may be saved during a complete hoses at the compressor discharge and suction
system pump down by replacing the filter drier and liquid line service valve (see Figure 7.4). Be
with a section of copper tubing and the appropri- sure the service hoses are suited for evacuation
ate fittings. Installation of a new drier may be purposes.
performed during the charging procedure.

NOTICE
To prevent the area between the Econo-
mizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) and the Com-
pressor from being isolated during
evacuation, it is necessary to open the
ESV using a magnet tool, Carrier Transi-
cold part number 07−00512−00.

T-365 Rev B 7–4

 tion valve and the liquid service valve but leave
To prevent the area between the DUV and the service valves frontseated until evacuation is
the Compressor from being isolated completed.
during evacuation, it is necessary to
open the DUV using a magnet tool, Car- 2. Once evacuation has been completed and the
rier Transicold part number 07−00512−00. pump has been isolated, fully backseat the ser-
vice valves to isolate the service connections
3. Remove the ESV and DUV coils from the valve and then continue with checking and, if required,
bodies. Place the magnet tool over the valve adding refrigerant in accordance with normal
stem, an audible click will be heard when the procedures.
ESV opens.
7.7 REFRIGERANT CHARGE

NOTICE
Make sure to replace the valve coils ! WARNING
before restating the unit. Starting the unit EXPLOSION HAZARD Failure to follow
with the coil removed from the valve will this WARNING can result in death, seri-
burn out the coil. ous personal injury and / or property
damage.
4. Test the evacuation setup for leaks by backseat-
ing the unit service valves and drawing a deep
Never use air or gases containing oxygen
vacuum with the vacuum pump and gauge
(O2) for leak testing or operating the
valves open. Shut off the pump and check to see
product.
if the vacuum holds. Repair leaks if necessary.

5. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves. Charge only with R−134a: Refrigerant
must conform to AHRI Standard 700
6. Open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum specification.
gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start
the vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the elec- 7.7.1 Checking the Refrigerant Charge
tronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 microns.
Close the electronic vacuum gauge and vacuum
pump valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait a NOTICE
few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds.
Use a refrigerant recovery system when-
7. Break the vacuum with either clean dry refriger- ever removing refrigerant. When working
ant 134a or dry nitrogen. Raise system pressure with refrigerants you must comply with
to roughly 0.14 bar (2 psig), monitoring it with the all local government environmental laws.
compound gauge. In the U.S.A., refer to EPA Section 608.

8. If R134a was used, remove refrigerant using a 1. Connect the gauge manifold to the compressor
refrigerant recovery system. If nitrogen was discharge and suction service valves. For units
used, relieve the pressure. operating on a water cooled condenser, change
over to air cooled operation.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 one time.
2. Bring the container temperature to approxi-
[Link] the copper tubing and change the filter mately 0°C (32°F) or below. Then set the con-
drier. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the troller set point to -25°C (-13°F).
electronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump
valves. Shut off the vacuum pump. Wait five 3. Partially block the condenser coil inlet air. If cov-
minutes to see if vacuum holds. This procedure ering the lower portion of the coil is not sufficient,
checks for residual moisture and/or leaks. remove the left hand infill panel and cover the
left side of the coil. Increase the area blocked
11. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant until the compressor discharge pressure is
charge may be drawn into the system from a raised to approximately 12.8 bar (185 psig).
refrigerant container on weight scales.
4. On units equipped with a receiver, the level
7.6.4 Partial System should be between the glasses. On units
equipped with a watercooled condenser, the
1. If refrigerant charge has been removed from the level should be at the center of the glass. If the
low side only, evacuate the low side by connect-
ing the evacuation set-up at the compressor suc-

7–5 T-365 Rev B

 refrigerant level is not correct, continue with the 7.8 COMPRESSOR
following paragraphs to add or remove refriger-
ant as required.

7.7.2 Adding Refrigerant to System (Full

! WARNING
Charge) Make sure power to the unit is OFF and
power plug disconnected before replac-
1. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. (Refer ing the compressor.
to Section 7.6.)

2. Place cylinder of R-134a on scale and connect

charging line from cylinder to liquid line valve. ! WARNING
Purge charging line at liquid line valve and then Before disassembly of the compressor,
note weight of cylinder and refrigerant. be sure to relieve the internal pressure
3. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Open liquid line very carefully by slightly loosening the
valve half-way and allow liquid refrigerant to flow couplings to break the seal.
into the unit until the correct weight of refrigerant
(refer to Section 3.2) has been added as indi-
cated by scales. ! CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
NOTICE tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
compressor to evacuate the system
It may be necessary to finish charging below 0 psig. Never operate the compres-
unit through suction service valve in gas sor with the suction or discharge service
form, due to pressure rise in high side of valves closed (frontseated). Internal dam-
the system. age will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum.
4. Backseat manual liquid line valve (to close off
gauge port). Close liquid valve on cylinder. 7.8.1 Removal and Replacement of Compres-
sor
5. Start unit in cooling mode. Run for approximately
10 minutes and check the refrigerant charge. 1. Turn the unit start−stop switch (ST) and unit cir-
cuit breaker (CB−1) OFF, and disconnect power
7.7.3 Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial to the unit. Follow the regional lock out tag out
Charge) procedure for electrical system.
1. Examine refrigerant system for any evidence of 2. Remove the compressor guard and install
leaks, repair as necessary. (Refer to Section R134a manifold gauges on the compressor suc-
7.5.). tion and discharge service valves.
2. Maintain the conditions outlined in Section 3. Remove the Digital Un−loader (DUV) coil and
7.7.1. place the magnet on the valve stem to open the
3. Fully backseat the suction service valve and coil. Leave magnet on the coil. If a magnet is not
remove the service port cap. available perform the Jumper procedure:

4. Connect charging line between suction service a. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a,
valve port and cylinder of refrigerant R-134a. F3b).
Open VAPOR valve. b. Remove the KA6 wire from KA controller con-
5. Partially frontseat (turn clockwise) the suction nector on the front of the controller.
service valve and slowly add charge until the c. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side
refrigerant appears at the proper level. Be care- of transformer (black wire) and locate it away
ful not to frontseat the suction valve fully, if the for the transformer.
compressor is operated in a vacuum, internal
damage may result. d. Jumper between the black transformer wire
to the KA6 wire removed from the connector.

e. Connect power to unit and turn circuit

breaker on (DUV coil is now energized).

T-365 Rev B 7–6

4. Connect a refrigerant recovery machine and and Figure 7.5 Compressor Kit
recover any refrigerant out of the compressors
and DUV line following the recovery machine 3 4
recommendations (refer to the recovery 2
machines Operation and Service manual for 2
proper procedures).
5
5. If a jumper was used in step c, on completion of
the recovery turn the circuit breaker off and dis-
connect the power. Follow the regional lock out 6
tag out procedure for electrical system.
7
6. Remove the compressor terminal cover, discon- 11, 12
nect the ground wire and remove (pull) the cable 8
plug from the compressor terminals. Install the
terminal cover back after removing the power 7
cable. 1
9
NOTICE 10
Inspect the power cable (plug) terminals
to ensure they are not deformed or have
any signs of heat or arcing. If any dam- 1. Compressor 7. SST Washers
age is noted replace the power cable. 2. Teflon Seal for Valve 8. Resilient Mount
Connection (2) 9. Mylar Washers
7. Remove the rotalock fittings from the suction
and discharge service connections, and uncou- 3. O−Ring (Unloader 10. Wire Ties
Connection) 11. Power Cable Gasket
ple the unloader and economizer lines from the
compressor. 4. Compressor Dis- 12. Ground Connection
charge Temperature Screw
8. Cut the dome temperature sensor wires. The Sensor
13. Power Cable Lubri-
replacement compressor comes with a dome 5. O−Ring (Economizer cant − Krytox (Not
temperature sensor already assembled. Connection) Shown)
6. Base Mounting Bolts
9. Remove and save the compressor base−mount- -----
ing screws. Discard the resilient mounts and
washers.

[Link] (slide out) the old compressor from the

unit tagging it with unit information and reason [Link] the new SST washers (Figure 7.5, item # 7)
for replacement. on each side of the resilient mounts (Figure 7.5,
item #8), and the new mylar washer (Figure 7.5,
11. Wire tie the compressor base plate with the wire item # 9) on the bottom of it as shown in Figure
ties (Figure 7.5, item # 10) to the compressor, 7.7. Install the four base−mounting screws
and slide the new compressor in the unit. You loosely.
may need to slightly tilt the compressor back.
DO NOT add any oil to the replacement com- [Link] the new teflon seals (Figure 7.5, item # 2)
pressor. Replacement compressor is shipped at the compressor suction and discharge ports
with full oil charge of 60 oz. as well as the O−rings (Figure 7.5, items #3 and
#5) at the unloader and economizer line connec-
[Link] and discard the wire ties that were used to tion ports. Lubricate the O−rings and the shoul-
hold the base plate to the compressor. der of the ORS fittings for the unloader and
economizer ports. Hand tight all four connec-
tions.

[Link] the four base−mounting screws (Figure

7.5, item #6) to 6.2 mkg (45 ft−lbs.).

7–7 T-365 Rev B

 [Link] the compressor ports / connections to Figure 7.7 Lubricating Orange Gasket
the following values. (Refer to Figure 7.6 for
locations):

Service Valve / Connection Torque Value

1 Suction and Discharge 108.5 to 135.5 Nm

Rotalocks (80 to 100 ft−lbs.)

2 Unloader connection 24.5 to 27 Nm

(18 to 20 ft−lbs.)

3 Economized connection 32.5 to 35 Nm

(24 to 26 ft−lbs.)

Figure 7.6 Compressor Ports/Connections

b. Install the orange gasket part onto the com-
DLV DUV pressor fusite with the grooved or threaded
2 side out as shown in Figure 7.8. Ensure that
the gasket is seated onto the fusite base.

Figure 7.8 Installing Orange Gasket

3
1

[Link] the new compressor dome temperature

sensor with the old sensor wires removed in step c. Coat the inside of the power plug (female)
i using butt−splices and heat shrinks. Wire−tie connector pins with the Krytox lubricant (Fig-
any loose wiring as appropriate. ure 7.5, item #13), and Insert the plug onto
the compressor terminal connections. Make
[Link] the compressor terminal cover and con- sure, the orange gasket has bottomed out
nect the compressor power cable following the onto the fusite and it fits securely onto the ter-
steps below: minal pins while fully inserted into the orange
plug as shown in Figure 7.9 and Figure
a. Liberally coat the orange gasket (Figure 7.5,
7.10.
item #11) surfaces with the Krytox lubricant
(Figure 7.5, item #13) as shown in Figure
7.7.

T-365 Rev B 7–8

 Figure 7.9 Power Plug Connection [Link] seat service valves, connect power to the
unit; turn the unit ON and run it in full cool mode
for 10 minutes.

[Link] code select 59 (unit pump down).

Choosing code select 59, the user will be
advised to close (front seat) the Liquid Line
Valve (king valve). The display will flash “CLOSE
LLV” and “PrESS EntEr.” Upon closing the valve,
select the enter key. Pump down “PdN” will dis-
play on the left with the suction pressure on the
right. Upon completion of the pump down the
display will flash between “PdN”“DOnE” and
“SHUT OFF.”

[Link] seat the suction and discharge service

valve and replace the filter drier.

[Link] the suction side and compressor to

Figure 7.10 Power Plug Secured
1000 microns.

[Link] all service valves, and run in full cool.

[Link] refrigerant charge level per the unit s

operation/service manual.

[Link] a leak check of the system.

[Link] any removed wire tie wraps and rein-

stall compressor guard.

[Link] failure occurs under the unit’s warranty, tag the

replacement part for cause of failure and collect
an all data download for failure analysis.

7.9 HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH

7.9.1 Checking High Pressure Switch

[Link] the green ground wire (Figure 7.10 ! WARNING

above) to the grounding tab located inside the
terminal box of the compressor using the self Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
tapping grounding screw (Figure 7.5, item #12). pressure regulator.
Close the compressor terminal box using the ter-
minal cover removed.

[Link] the compressor to 1000 microns (refer

NOTICE
to the Operation and Service manual for proper The high pressure switch is non-adjust-
procedures). able.
If jumper procedure was used in step c, recon-
nect unit to power and turn on the circuit breaker 1. Remove switch as outlined in Figure 7.9.2.
to again power the DUV.
2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across
[Link] completion of the vacuum, remove the mag- switch terminals. Ohm meter will indicate no
net and reinstall the DUV coil. resistance or continuity light will be illuminated if
If a jumper was used, turn off the circuit breaker the switch closed after relieving compressor
and disconnect power. Reconnect the X1 wire to pressure.
the black transformer wire. Reinstall and secure
3. Connect hose to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. (See
the KA6 wire to the KA plug at the controller.
Figure 7.11)

7–9 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 7.11 High Pressure Switch Testing debris from the coil. A high pressure washer is not
required, mains water pressure is sufficient. To clean
Pressure Gauge the condenser coil perform the following procedure:
Cylinder Valve & Gauge
Bleed-Off Valve

Pressure Regulator
! WARNING
Do not remove the condenser fan grille
before turning power OFF and discon-
Nitrogen Cylinder 1/4 inch Connection necting the power plug.

1. Make sure the unit is powered off and the plug is

disconnected.
4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator at 26.4 kg/cm2 2. Remove the condenser fan grille.
(375 psig) with bleed-off valve closed.
3. Starting from the top of the coil, use a water
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off hose with a nozzle to wash the coil from the
valve. inside out.
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off 4. Systematically wash across the inside top face
valve to increase pressure on switch. The switch of the coil until the water runs clean.
should open at a static pressure up to 25 kg/cm2
(350 psig). If a light is used, the light will go out. 5. Wash down the center section, and then through
If an ohmmeter is used, the meter will indicate the bottom of the coil, continue washing until the
open circuit. water runs clear.
7. Slowly open bleed-off valve to decrease the 6. After the coil is clean, rinse the condenser fan to
pressure. The switch should close at 18 kg/cm2 remove any dirt build up from the blades.
(250 psig).
7. Replace the condenser fan grille ensuring that it
7.9.2 Replacing High Pressure Switch is centered around the fan.

1. Remove the refrigerant charge. 7.10.2 Condenser Coil Removal

2. Disconnect wiring from defective switch. The 1. Using a refrigerant reclaim system remove the
high pressure switch is located on the discharge refrigerant charge.
connection or line and is removed by turning
counterclockwise.

3. Install a new high pressure switch after verifying

! WARNING
switch settings. Do not remove the condenser fan grille
before turning power OFF and discon-
4. Evacuate, dehydrate and recharge the system. necting the power plug.
5. Start the unit, verify refrigeration charge and oil 2. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts
level. and washers for reuse.

7.10 CONDENSER COIL 3. Remove the condenser fan.

The condenser coil consists of a series of parallel cop- 4. Remove the infill panels to the left and right of
per tubes expanded into copper fins and formed into a the condenser fan shroud.
“C” shape with the fourth side of the square formed by
the side support bracket. 5. Remove the condenser fan shroud.

6. Unplug the condenser fan motor.

7.10.1 Condenser Coil Cleaning
To ensure optimal efficiency of the unit the condenser 7. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around
coil must be clean. The condenser coil should be the motor wire harness to allow the harness to
cleaned at least once a year, but more frequent clean- be slid back through the side support bracket.
ing may be required depending on operating condi-
8. Cut the top and bottom drain lines midway
tions. The coil is cleaned with fresh water sprayed in
between the side support bracket and the first
the reverse direction of the air flow to remove any
cable tie, approx 150mm (6”) from the side sup-
port bracket.

T-365 Rev B 7–10

 9. Remove and retain sufficient putty from around a. Refit the side support bracket bolts.
the drain lines to allow the tubes to be slid back
through the side support bracket. b. Refit the top support bracket bolts as well as
the top grille extension support.
[Link] filter drier.
c. Refit the bottom support bracket bolts.
11. Unbraze the inlet connection to coil.
3. Braze the condenser coil inlet connection.
[Link] the cushion clamps securing the liquid
line to the top and bottom receiver brackets, 4. Insert the receiver pipe work onto the coil outlet
retain all clamps and securing hardware. and loosely secure the receiver assembly to the
side support bracket with the retained hardware.
[Link] a support under the condenser coil before
releasing the coil from the frame. 5. Braze the outlet connection to the receiver
assembly.
[Link] the lower mounting bracket bolts from
the inside of the coil. 6. Install a new filter drier.

[Link] the top mounting bracket bolts and 7. Replace the liquid line cushion clamps.
grille extension mount from inside the coil. 8. Secure the receiver assembly to the side sup-
[Link] the side support bracket mounting port bracket.
bolts. 9. Pressure / leak test the coil and filter drier con-
[Link] the condenser assembly with receiver out nections, refer to Section 7.5.
of the unit. [Link] the entire unit, refer to Section 7.6.
7.10.3 Condenser Coil Preparation 11. Slide the top and bottom drain lines back into
Before installing the new condenser coil, the receiver place through the side support bracket.
assembly and mounting hardware must be removed
[Link] the two supplied straight connectors and
from the old coil assembly:
contact adhesive reconnect the drain lines.
1. From the old coil, unbolt the receiver assembly
[Link] the condenser fan motor wiring harness
from side support bracket.
back through the side support bracket and refit
2. Unbraze the receiver assembly from the coil out- to condenser motor.
let line and remove from the coil assembly.
[Link] all wire ties that were removed to prop-
3. Unbolt the side support bracket from the top and erly secure the drain line and wiring.
bottom coil supports and remove from old coil.
[Link] the wire harness and drain line penetra-
4. Refit the side support bracket to the new coil tions with the putty.
ensuring that the top and bottom are flush
[Link] the condenser fan onto the motor shaft
mounted with the coil support.
reversed but do not secure.
7.10.4 Condenser Coil Installation [Link] the condenser fan shroud to the unit. Use
Once the side support bracket has been secured to the the condenser fan as a guide to ensure the
new condenser coil, the entire assembly is ready to be shroud is properly centered around the fan.
installed into the unit:
[Link] the condenser fan, and place it on the
1. Slide the new condenser coil into place ensuring shaft facing the correct direction. Adjust the fan
the coil inlet connection is mated to the pipework to the correct position, 37mm (1.5”) from the fan
and that the coil is fully supported. shroud, see Figure 7.12.
2. Secure the condenser coil into the unit using the
retained hardware; refit the mylar and fender
washers:

7–11 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 7.12 Condenser Fan Position 2. Remove the condenser fan by loosening the two
set screws.

3. Disconnect the condenser fan motor wiring.

37mm (1.5”)
! CAUTION
Take necessary steps (place plywood
Fan
over coil or use sling on motor) to pre-
vent motor from falling into condenser
coil.

4. Note the number of shims on each side of the

motor as the same configuration will be required
to refit the new motor.
Shroud
5. Remove the fan motor mounting hardware and
remove motor.

6. Loosely mount the new motor using new lock

nuts.

7. Connect the fan motor wiring to the new fan

motor.

8. Replace the shims in the same configuration as

they were removed.

9. Tighten the fan motor mounting bolts to properly

secure the motor.
[Link] Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and
tighten. [Link] make sure that the motor is aligned properly,
slide the condenser fan onto the motor shaft
[Link] left and right infill panels. reversed but do not secure.
[Link] the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille 11. Rotate the fan to make sure the fan blades do
is properly centered around the condenser fan. not contact the shroud:
[Link] the entire unit, refer to Section 7.6. a. If the fan motor is misaligned vertically, add
or remove shims to align.
[Link] the unit with the charge shown on the
unit serial plate, refer to Section 7.7. It is import- b. If the fan motor is not properly centered,
ant for proper unit operation that the charge is loosen the mounting bolts, and adjust the
weighed into the unit. motor position on the bracket, and then
secure the motor.
7.11 CONDENSER FAN AND FAN MOTOR
[Link] the condenser fan, and connect the fan
The condenser fan rotates counter-clockwise (viewed motor wiring to the fan motor.
from front of unit). The fan pulls air through the con-
denser coil, and discharges the air horizontally through [Link] the condenser fan on the shaft facing the
the front of the unit. correct direction. Adjust the fan to the correct
position, 37mm (1.5”) from the fan shroud, see
7.11.1 Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace Figure 7.12.

[Link] Loctite “H” on the fan set screws, and

! WARNING tighten.
Do not remove the condenser fan grille [Link] the left and right infill panels.
before turning power OFF and discon-
necting the power plug. [Link] the condenser fan grille, ensuring the grille
is properly centered around condenser fan.
1. Remove the condenser fan grille, retain all bolts
and washers for reuse.

T-365 Rev B 7–12

7.12 FILTER DRIER 6. Disconnect the defrost temperature sensor (refer
to Section 7.25) from the coil.
To check filter drier:
7. Remove middle coil support.
1. Test for a restricted or plugged filter drier by feel-
ing the liquid line inlet and outlet connections. If 8. After defective coil is removed from unit, remove
the outlet side feels cooler than the inlet side, defrost heaters and install on replacement coil.
then the filter drier should be changed. 9. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
2. Check the moisture-liquid indicator if the indica- [Link] check connections. Evacuate and add
tor shows a high level of moisture, the filter drier refrigerant charge.
should be replaced.
7.13.2 Evaporator Heater Replacement
To replace filter drier:
The heaters are wired directly back to the contactor
1. Pump down the unit (refer to Section 7.4). Evac- and if a heater failure occurs during a trip, the heater
uate if unit is not equipped with service valves. set containing that heater may be disconnected at the
Then replace filter drier. contactor.
The next Pre-trip (P1) will detect that a heater set has
2. Evacuate the low side in accordance with Sec- been disconnected and indicate that the failed heater
tion 7.6. should be replaced. To remove a heater, do the follow-
3. After unit is in operation, inspect for moisture in ing:
system and check charge.

7.13 EVAPORATOR COIL & HEATER ASSEMBLY ! WARNING

The evaporator section, including the evaporator coil, Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers
should be cleaned regularly. The preferred cleaning (CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main
fluid is fresh water or steam. Another recommended power supply before working on moving
cleaner is Oakite 202 or similar, following manufac- parts.
turer’s instructions. 1. Before servicing unit, make sure the circuit
The two drain pan hoses are routed behind the con- breakers (CB-1 and CB-2) and start-stop switch
denser fan motor and compressor. The drain pan (ST) are in the OFF position, and the power plug
line(s) must be open to ensure adequate drainage. is disconnected.

7.13.1 Evaporator Coil Replacement 2. Remove the upper back panel.

1. Pump unit down. (Refer to Section 7.4). 3. Determine which heater(s) need replacing by
checking resistance of each heater set. Refer to
Section 3.3 for heater resistance values. Once
! WARNING the set containing the failed heater is deter-
mined, cut the splice connection and retest to
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers
determine the actual failed heater(s).
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main
power supply before working on moving 4. Remove hold-down clamp securing heater(s) to
parts. coil.
2. With power OFF and power plug removed, 5. Lift the bent end of the heater (with the opposite
remove the screws securing the panel covering end down and away from coil). Move heater to
the evaporator section (upper panel). the side enough to clear the heater end support
and remove.
3. Disconnect the defrost heater wiring.

4. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil. To replace a heater, do steps 1 through 5 in
reverse.
5. Unsolder the two coil connections, one at the
distributor and the other at the coil header.

7–13 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 7.13 Heater Arrangement

Bracket

Heater Element

Retainer

7.14 EVAPORATOR FAN AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY 2. Remove the spanner wrench. Use a universal
wheel puller and remove the fan from the shaft.
The evaporator fans circulate air throughout the con-
Remove the washers and key.
tainer by pulling air in the top of the unit. The air is
forced through the evaporator coil where it is either 3. Remove the four 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts that are
heated or cooled and then discharged out the bottom located under the fan that support the motor and
of the refrigeration unit into the container. The fan stator housing. Remove the motor and plastic
motor bearings are factory lubricated and do not spacer.
require additional grease.
7.14.3 Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly
7.14.1 Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly
1. Assemble the motor and plastic spacer onto the
stator.
! WARNING
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers NOTICE
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main
power supply before working on moving When removing the black nylon evapora-
parts. tor fan blade, care must be taken to
assure that the blade is not damaged. In
1. Remove access panel by removing mounting the past, it was a common practice to
bolts and TIR locking device. Reach inside of insert a screwdriver between the fan
unit and remove the Ty-Rap securing the wire blades to keep it from turning. This prac-
harness loop. Disconnect the connector by twist- tice can no longer be used, as the blade
ing to unlock and pulling to separate. is made up of a material that will be dam-
aged. It is recommended that an impact
2. Loosen four 1/4-20 clamp bolts that are located
wrench be used when removing the
on the underside of the fan deck at the sides of
blade. Do not use the impact wrench
the fan assembly. Slide the loosened clamps
when reinstalling, as galling of the stain-
back from the fan assembly.
less steel shaft can occur.
3. Slide the fan assembly out from the unit and
2. Apply Loctite to the 1/4-20 x 3/4 long bolts and
place on a sturdy work surface.
torque to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds).
7.14.2 Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assem- 3. Place one 5/8 flat washer on the shoulder of the
bly fan motor shaft. Insert the key in the keyway and
1. Attach a spanner wrench to the two 1/4-20 holes lubricate the fan motor shaft and threads with a
located in the fan hub. Loosen the 5/8-18 shaft graphite-oil solution (such as Never-seez).
nut by holding the spanner wrench stationary 4. Install the fan onto the motor shaft. Place one 5/
and turning the 5/8-18 nut counter-clockwise 8 flat washer with a 5/8-18 locknut onto the
(see Figure 7.14). motor shaft and torque to 40 foot-pounds.

T-365 Rev B 7–14

 Figure 7.14 Evaporator Fan Assembly However, it is still highly recommended that after carry-
ing cargo subject to fumigation procedures, that the
Washer inside of the unit be thoroughly cleansed prior to reuse.
Nut
Fan Carrier Transicold has identified a fully biodegradable
and environmentally safe alkaline cleaning agent
(Tri−Pow’r® HD) for the unit. This will assist in helping
to remove the corrosive fumigation chemicals and dis-
Stator lodging of the corrosive elements.
Screws,
Washers This cleaner is available from the Carrier Transicold
Performance Parts Group (PPG) and can be ordered
through any of the PPG locations; Part Number
NU4371−88.
As a general safety precaution, before using this prod-
uct, refer to and retain the Material Safety Data
Protector (MSDS) sheet. This document can be found at:
[Link]/products/coil_cleaners_trip-
Motor
[Link]

Prior to Cleaning:
• Always wear goggles, gloves and work boots.

5. Install the evaporator fan assembly in reverse • Avoid contact with skin and clothing, and avoid
order of removal. Torque the four 1/4-20 clamp breathing mists.
bolts to 0.81 mkg (70 inch-pounds). Connect the • When mixing, add water to the sprayer first, then
wiring connector. the cleaner.
6. Replace access the panel making sure that the • ALWAYS provide for proper ventilation when
panel does not leak. Make sure that the TIR cleaning indoor evaporator coils (rear doors
locking device is lockwired. must be open).
• Be aware of surroundings − food, plants, etc.,
7.15 EVAPORATOR SECTION CLEANING
and the potential for human exposure.
Containers and Container units that are exposed to
• Always read directions and follow recommended
certain fumigants may develop visible surface corro-
dilution ratios. More is not always better. Using
sion. This corrosion will show up as a white powder
non−diluted cleaner is not recommended.
found on the inside of the container and on the reefer
unit evaporator stator and fan deck.
Cleaning Procedure:
Analyses by Carrier Transicold environmental special-
ists have identified the white powder as consisting pre- 1. Remove the upper evaporator access panel
dominantly of aluminum oxide. Aluminum oxide is a inside of the unit.
coarse crystalline deposit most likely the result of sur-
face corrosion on the aluminum parts within the con- 2. Spray the surface with water before applying the
tainer. If left untreated over time, it may build up in cleaning solution. This helps the cleaner work
thickness and eventually flake as a lightweight white better.
powder. 3. Liberally apply the prepared cleaner solution (5
The surface corrosion of aluminum is brought about by parts water and 1 part cleaner).
exposure to chemicals such as sulfur dioxide and pos-
sibly other fumigants that are commonly used for fumi- 4. Allow the cleaner to soak in for 5 to 7 minutes.
gation and protection of some perishable cargo such 5. Assess area for rinsing. Follow all local regula-
as grapes, for example. Fumigation is the process by tions regarding disposal of waste water.
which a chemical is released into an enclosed area to
eliminate infestations of insects, termites, rodents, 6. Thoroughly rinse the cleaner and surrounding
weeds and soil−born disease. area, floor, etc. When rinsing where heavy foam-
Typically any aluminum oxide that becomes detached ing solution is present, it is very important to take
from evaporator fan stators will be blown into the wet the time to thoroughly rinse the equipment and
evaporator coil where it will be caught and then flushed surroundings.
out of the unit during routine defrost cycles.
7. Always rinse the empty coil cleaner bottle, cap
tightly and dispose of properly.

7–15 T-365 Rev B

7.16 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE Figure 7.15 Electronic Expansion Valve
The electronic expansion valve (EEV) is an automatic
device which maintains required superheat of the Coil
Boot
refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator. The valve func-
tions are: (a) automatic response of refrigerant flow to Coil
match the evaporator load and (b) prevention of liquid
refrigerant entering the compressor. Unless the valve Electronic
Expansion
is defective, it seldom requires any maintenance.
Valve
7.16.1 Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve
and Strainer
FLOW
DIRECTION
Removing an EEV:

! WARNING Strainer

Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers

(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main
power supply before working on moving 3. Replace filter drier.
parts.
4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum
1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section pump on liquid line and suction service valve.
7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge
valves. 5. Open liquid line service valve and check refriger-
ant level.
2. Turn unit power off and remove power from the
unit. 6. Check superheat. (Refer to Section 3.2).

3. Remove coil. 7. Check unit operation by running Pre−trip (Refer

to Section 5.8).
4. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of
removing the valve is to cut the connection 7.17 ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE
between the brazed section and the valve, using
a small tube cutter. Remove valve. Figure 7.16 Coil View of Economizer Solenoid
Valve (ESV)
Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool.
Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body Slotted Screw
and remove valve.
Top Coil (Small) O-Ring
5. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if neces-
sary.
Solenoid Coil, Enclosing Tube
and Body
Installing an EEV; Reverse steps 1 through 4 above
%RWWRP&RLOODUJH2íULQJ
to install a new valve.

1. Install the valve and a new strainer with the cone Brass Spacer
of strainer / screen pointing into liquid line at the
inlet to the valve.
Removing a Solenoid Valve Coil:
2. During installation, make sure the EEV coil is
snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is
properly seated in one of the valve body dim- ! WARNING
ples. Also, ensure that coil boot is properly fitted
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breakers
over valve body. See Figure 7.15.
(CB-1 & CB-2) and disconnect main
power supply before working on moving
parts.

1. Turn unit power off and remove power from the

unit. Disconnect leads.

T-365 Rev B 7–16

 2. Remove top screw and o−ring. Remove coil and 7.18.1 Economizer Expansion Replacement
save mounting hardware, seals and spacer for
reuse. (See Figure 7.16). Refer to step d. for Figure 7.17 Economizer Expansion Valve
valve coil replacement.

b. Removing the Solenoid Valve:

1. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section

7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge Inlet
valves.

2. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of

removing the solenoid valve is to cut the connec-
tion between the brazed section and the valve,
using a small tube cutter. Remove valve. Alter-
nately, heat inlet and outlet connections to valve Outlet
body and remove valve.

3. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if neces-

sary.
1. Removing the Economizer Expansion Valve:
c. Installing the Solenoid Valve:

1. Fit the new solenoid valve into position and NOTICE

braze. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool when-
ever brazing. The economizer expansion valve is a her-
metic valve, it does not have adjustable
d. Installing the Solenoid Valve Coil: superheat (See Figure 7.17).

1. Install the brass spacer on the valve stem. a. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section
7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge
2. Lubricate both o−rings with silicone provided in valves. Evacuate if unit is not equipped with
the kit. service valves. Refer to Section 7.6.

3. Install bottom coil o−ring on the valve stem. b. Turn unit power off and remove power from
the unit.
4. Install the solenoid coil on the valve stem.
c. Remove cushion clamps located on the inlet
5. Place the top coil o−ring on the coil mounting and outlet lines.
screw and secure the coil to the valve using a
torque wrench. Torque the screw to 25 in−lbs. d. Remove insulation (Presstite) from expan-
sion valve bulb.
6. Connect coil wires using butt−splices and
heat−shrink tubing. e. Unstrap the bulb, located on the economizer
line.
7.18 ECONOMIZER EXPANSION VALVE
f. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of
The economizer expansion valve is an automatic removing the valve is to cut the connection
device that maintains constant superheat of the refrig- between the brazed section and the valve,
erant gas leaving at the point of bulb attachment, using a small tube cutter. Remove valve.
regardless of suction pressure. Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires main- Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve
tenance other than periodic inspection to ensure that body and remove valve.
the thermal bulb is tightly secured to the suction line
g. Clean the valve stem with mild cleaner, if
and wrapped with insulating compound.
necessary.

2. Installing the Economizer Expansion Valve:

a. The economizer expansion valve should be

wrapped in a soaked cloth for brazing.

b. Braze inlet connection to inlet line.

c. Braze outlet connection to outlet line.

7–17 T-365 Rev B

 d. Reinstall the cushion clamps on inlet and out- 5. Connect power to unit and turn circuit breaker on
let lines. (DUV coil is now energized).
3. Replace filter drier, (Refer to Section 7.12). 6. Pressure should drop.
4. Evacuate to 500 microns by placing vacuum 7. Power circuit breaker off, reconnect wires and
pump on liquid line and suction service valve. reinstall fuses.
5. Check economizer expansion valve superheat If the valve opens and closes properly, the failure mode
(see Section 3.2). is with the compressor and it should be changed at the
earliest opportunity.
7.19 TROUBLESHOOTING P6-7 (DLV/DUV)
7.19.2 Digital Loader Valve and Unloader Valve
7.19.1 Digital Unloader Valve (DUV) (DLV/DUV)

A failed digital unloader valve (DUV), which is normally The EDGE model also has a digital loader valve (DLV
closed,) or an internal seal failure of the compressor normally closed). A failed digital loader valve will result
can result in the unit running continually in the fully in the unit’s inability to cool due to a reduction in refrig-
loaded mode causing it to undershoot its set point tem- erant flow where a failed digital unloader valve / DUV
perature. (normally closed) will result in the unit undershooting its
set point due to its inability to unload the compressor.
Both of these can be checked out by running pre-trip
test P6-7. When running P6-7, the controller is looking Both of these valves can be checked out by running
for the differences in pressure and current draw pre-trip test P6-7. If pre-trip test P6-7 fails then the fol-
between loaded mode and unloaded mode to make a lowing checks need to be made to identify which of the
judgment. If there are no differences, then it will show valves has failed.
fail. 1. Connect manifold gauge set to Discharge and
To confirm which what has caused the test to fail, per- Suction service valves. Refer to Section 7.2.
form the following additional test.
2. Using Code 41, Service function, Valve Override
1. Connect manifold gauge set to discharge and Control as follows:
suction service valves.
a. Set the tIM (Override Time to ~5 minutes)
2. Front seat the SSV and pump down the com-
pressor. b. Set the PCnt: Detailed below

3. Front seat the discharge Service Valve. c. Display Code 03, Compressor Motor Current
value
4. Disconnect DUV from the top of compressor and By monitoring the compressor amperage and pressure,
cap the compressor fitting with the fitting the technician can determine which component has
removed from the service valve. failed.
5. Using R134, pressurize the line to 50 psi (3.45 Set the PCnt (100%setting – DLV Capacity TEST)
bar) at the suction service valve connection and If the compressor is able to load, the compressor
check for leaks at the DUV outlet fitting at the amperage and the discharge pressure will rise and
compressor. the suction pressure will drop – DLV is okay. If dis-
charge pressure does not rise, the DLV should be
6. Energize DUV by placing a magnet on the valve
replaced.
stem opening the valve. Pressure will drop.
The Digital Loader Valve Solenoid coil cycles: 0 to
If a magnet is not available, a jumper procedure can be
0.6 amp DC (AC/DC current clamp)
used as follows:
Set the PCnt (20%setting – DUV Modulation TEST).
1. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a, F3b). If the compressor is able to unload, the compressor
2. Remove the KA6 wire from KA controller con- amperage and discharge pressure drops and the
nector on the front of the controller. suction pressure will climb – DUV is okay. If the dis-
charge pressure does not decrease after the valve
3. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side of energizes, replace the DUV.
transformer (black wire) and locate it away from Unloader Valve Solenoid coil cycles: 0 to 0.4 amp
the transformer. AC (AC/DC current clamp)
4. Jumper between the black transformer wires to
the KA6 wire removed from the connector.

T-365 Rev B 7–18

7.20 DIGITAL LOADER VALVE 2. Installing the DLV:

7.20.1 Digital Loader Valve Replacement a. Lubricate the gland shoulder area and o−ring
with refrigerant oil.
1. Removing the DLV:
b. Fit new valve in position and hand−tighten
a. Pump down the compressor (refer to Section the o−ring nut.
7.4) and frontseat both suction and discharge
valves. In the event the DLV is stuck open c. Use a wet rag to keep valve cool while braz-
and compressor cannot pump down, remove ing. Braze DLV to service valve connection.
charge.
d. Reinstall and tighten the brackets that secure
the valve body to the discharge line.
! CAUTION e. Torque o−ring face seal connections to 18 to
The scroll compressor achieves low suc- 20 ft−lbs.
tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the f. Install the coil onto the valve body and
compressor to evacuate the system tighten the attachment bolt.
below 0 psig. Never operate the compres-
sor with the suction or discharge service
valves closed (frontseated). Internal dam- NOTICE
age will result from operating the com-
pressor in a deep vacuum. Confirm that the small spacer tube is
inserted into the coil prior to attaching it
b. Turn unit power off and remove power from to the valve body. The valve will not func-
the unit. tion correctly without it.
c. Loosen bolt on top of the DLV and remove g. Leak check and evacuate low side of unit as
coil assembly. applicable. Refer to Section 7.6.

h. Open service valves.

NOTICE
7.20.2 Digital Loader Installation
There is a small spacer tube between the
top of the valve and the 12 VDC coil that 1. Power unit off and lock/tag out to prevent inad-
needs to be reinstalled into the solenoid vertent power up.
valve coil. When removing the coil, it may
2. Remove 8 bolts from guard under control box
fall out when lifted from the valve body.
and remove guard.
Take care that the spacer is not lost; the
valve will not function correctly without 3. Remove the digital unloader valve coil (DUV)
it. and place a magnet tool on the valve to open it.
If a magnet is not available perform the Jumper
d. Remove clamps holding the DLV to the dis-
procedure:
charge line.
a. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a,
e. Loosen the nuts attaching the DLV to the top
F3b).
of the compressor.
b. Remove the wire from the KA6 connector on
f. VALVE REMOVAL: The preferred method of
the front of the controller.
removing the solenoid valve is to cut the con-
nection between the brazed section and the c. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side
valve, using a small tube cutter. Remove of transformer (black wire) and locate it away
valve. for the transformer.
Alternately, use a wet rag to keep valve cool.
Heat outlet connection to valve body and d. Jumper the black transformer wire to the KA6
remove valve. wire removed from the connector.

g. Examine compressor and service valves. e. Connect power to unit and turn circuit
Ensure that the o−ring is not stuck in the breaker on (DUV coil is now energized).
gland of the valve. 4. Connect a refrigerant recovery machine and
h. Discard the o−ring on the o−ring face seal recover refrigerant from the unit. (refer to the
connection. recovery machines Operation and Service man-
ual for proper procedures).

7–19 T-365 Rev B

 5. If jumper procedure was used for the recovery, [Link] completion of the vacuum, remove the mag-
turn the circuit breaker off and disconnect the net and reinstall the DUV coil. If a jumper was
power. Follow the regional lock out tag out pro- used, turn off the circuit breaker and disconnect
cedure for electrical. power. Remove jumper and reconnect the X1
wire to the black transformer wire. Reinstall and
6. Isolate valve by removing wire type wraps and secure the KA6 wire to the KA plug at the con-
conduit. Save any removed conduit for re−instal- troller.
lation.
[Link] the proper refrigerant charge into the unit
7. Remove top screw from the valve coil removing as per the units operation and service manual
the coil and spacer. Ensure to retain the spacer and perform a leak check of the system.
as it is required for proper operation of the valve.
Position coil away from valve body. [Link] the guard under the control box.
8. Using a tubing cutter cut the DLV refrigerant line [Link] changed under the units warranty, tag part with
as marked in Figure 7.18. unit information and cause of failure.

Figure 7.18 DLV Installation [Link] possible collect unit data download for future
failure analysis.
DUV
Step 9 7.21 DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE
DLV Step 8
7.21.1 Digital Unloader Replacement
Step
8 1. Power unit off and lock out / tag out to prevent
inadvertent power up. Follow the regional lock
out tag out procedure for electrical system.

2. Remove 8 bolts from guard under control box

and remove guard.

Wet Rag All Areas 3. Remove the digital unloader valve coil (DUV)
Prior to Brazing and place a magnet tool on the valve to open it.
If a magnet is not available perform the Jumper
procedure:
9. Unbolt the valve from the mounting bracket and
remove the valve assembly from the unit. a. Remove all 4 controller fuses (F1, F2, F3a,
F3b).
[Link] pipework stubs on both unit and valve
assembly in preparation for brazing. b. Remove the wire from the KA6 connector on
the front of the controller.
11. Refit valve coil to the valve body ensuring the
spacer ring is in place. c. Disconnect the X1 wire from the 24VAC side
of transformer (black wire) and locate it away
[Link] new valve assembly into place, coupling for the transformer.
the refrigerant lines.
d. Jumper the black transformer wire to the KA6
[Link] the solenoid coil to the mounting bracket wire removed from the connector.
of the new valve body and tighten.
e. Connect power to unit and turn circuit
[Link] rag valve body and bracket mounting breaker on (DUV coil is now energized).
clamp. Failure to wet rag the body may result in
the failure of the valve. 4. Using a refrigerant recovery machine, remove
the refrigerant from the unit. Refer to the Opera-
[Link] silver solder braze both bell connections. tion and Service manual of the selected recovery
machine for proper procedures.
[Link] the filter drier.
5. On completion of the recovery, if the jumper pro-
[Link] magnet still on the DUV stem, evacuate the cedure was used turn the circuit breaker off and
compressor to 1000 Microns. If jumper proce- disconnect the power. Follow the regional lock
dure was used in step 3, reconnect unit to power out tag out procedure for electrical system.
and turn on the circuit breaker to again power
the DUV. 6. Remove insulation from suction line to prevent
damage while brazing.

T-365 Rev B 7–20

7. If coil was not removed in step three, remove the [Link] heat shield behind the two braze points.
top screw from DUV coil and remove coil. Posi-
tion coil away from valve body. [Link] rag both the DUV, DLV and the suction ser-
vice valve bodies and clamp. Failure to wet rag
8. Cut the cable tie for the compressor dome tem- the body and mounts body may result in future
perature sensor and move wiring to one side. failure. Using silver solder braze both connec-
tions.
9. Using a tubing cutter, cut the lines marked at
locations in Figure 7.19. [Link] the filter drier.

Figure 7.19 DUV Installation [Link] magnet was used in step 3; remove the DUV
coil and place magnet on the stem to open the
valve for evacuation. If jumper procedure was
DLV Cut used in step 3, reconnect unit to power and turn
on the circuit breaker to again power the DUV.
DUV
[Link] the unit to 1000 Microns.

[Link] completion of the vacuum, remove the mag-

net and reinstall the DUV coil. If a jumper was
used, turn off the circuit breaker and disconnect
SSV power. Remove jumper and reconnect the X1
wire to the black transformer wire. Reinstall and
secure the KA6 wire to the KA plug at the con-
troller.
Wet Rag All Areas
Prior to Brazing [Link] the proper refrigerant charge into the unit
as per the units operation and service manual
and perform a leak check of the system.
Cut above Bell. Unïbraze, sliding the tubing
out of the bell on the service valve. [Link] and secure the wires and suction line
insulation.

[Link] the guard under the control box.

[Link] the unloader connection to the com-
pressor. Discard the O−ring as it will be [Link] changed under the units warranty, tag part with
replaced. Ensure that the O−ring is not left unit information and cause of failure.
attached to the compressor connection.
[Link] possible collect unit data download for future
11. Remove the DUV coil to bracket mounting failure analysis.
screws.
7.22 VALVE OVERRIDE CONTROLS
[Link] the bracket assembly out (right and for-
wards between suction and discharge lines). Controller function code Cd41 is a configurable code
that allows timed operation of the automatic valves for
[Link] wrap the suction service valve and troubleshooting. Test sequences are provided in Table
Un−braze the remaining section of line to the 7–1. Capacity mode (CAP) allows alignment of the
bell connection at the suction service valve. economizer solenoid valve in the standard and econo-
[Link] pipework stubs on both unit and valve mized operating configurations. DLV and DUV Capac-
assembly in preparation for brazing. ity Modulation,% Setting (PCnt) and Electronic
Expansion Valve (EEV) allows opening of the digital
[Link] coil onto the replacement valve stem and unloader valve and electronic expansion valve, respec-
slide into place. tively, to various percentages. If the unit is equipped
with an LIV, the Liquid Valve Setting allows the LIV to
[Link] couple the refrigerant connections and be automatically controlled, or manually opened and
secure the coil to the mounting bracket. closed.
[Link] the gland shoulder area and O−ring The Override Timer (tIM) selection is also provided to
(42−00243−04) with refrigerant oil and fit the enter a time period of up to five minutes, during which
economizer connection to the compressor. the override(s) are active. If the timer is active, valve
override selections will take place immediately. If the
[Link]−secure the coil to the bracket. timer is not active, changes will not take place for a few
[Link] unloader connection to the compressor seconds after the timer is started. When the timer times
24.5 to 27 Nm (18 to 20 ft−lbs).

7–21 T-365 Rev B

out, the override function is automatically terminated 3. Use an ARROW key to scroll to the desired set-
and the valves return to normal machinery control. To ting, and then press the ENTER key. Selections
operate the override: available for each of the tests are provided in
Table 7−1.
1. Press the CODE SELECT key then press an
ARROW key until Cd41 is displayed in the left 4. If the timer is not operating, follow the above pro-
window. The right window will display a control- cedure to display the timer. Use an ARROW key
ler communications code. to scroll to the desired time interval and press
ENTER to start the timer.
2. Press the ENTER key. The left display will show
a test name alternating with the test setting or 5. The above described sequence may be
time remaining. Use an ARROW key to scroll to repeated during the timer cycle to change to
the desired test. Press the ENTER key, SELCt another override.
will appear in the left display.
6. The above described sequence may be
repeated during the timer cycle to change to
another override.

Table 7–1 Valve Override Control Displays

Left Display Controller Communications Codes Setting Codes (Right Display)

(Right Display)

tIM 0 00 (0 minutes/0 Seconds)

(Override Timer) In 30 second increments to
5 00 (5 minutes/ 0 seconds)

PCnt AUtO
(% Setting − DLV/DUV Capacity) (Normal Machinery Control)
036
10
25
50
100

EEV AUtO
(% Setting − Electronic Expansion (Normal Machinery Control)
Cd 41/SELCt Valve) CLOSE (Closed)
036
10
25
50
100

CAP AUtO
(Capacity Mode) (Normal Control)

Std
UnLd
(Economizer = Closed)

ECOn
(Economizer = Open)

7.23 AUTOTRANSFORMER 2. Make sure that circuit breakers CB-1 and CB-2
are in the “ON” position. If the circuit breakers do
If the unit does not start, check the following:
not hold in, check voltage supply.
1. Make sure the 460 VAC (yellow) power cable is
3. There is no internal protector for this transformer
plugged into the receptacle (see Figure 7.20)
design, therefore, no checking of the internal
and locked in place.
protector is required.

T-365 Rev B 7–22

 4. Using a voltmeter, and with the primary supply 4. Carefully remove the module. Do not touch any
circuit ON, check the primary (input) voltage of the electrical connections if possible. Place
(460 VAC). Next, check the secondary (output) the module on the static mat.
voltage (230 VAC). The transformer is defective
if output voltage is not available. 5. The strap should be worn during any service
work on a module, even when it is placed on the
Figure 7.20 Autotransformer mat.

7.24.2 Controller Troubleshooting

460 VAC Power
Circuit Breaker (CB-2) Receptacle A group of test points (TP, see Figure 7.21) are pro-
230-Volt vided on the controller for troubleshooting electrical cir-
cuits (see schematic diagram, Section 8). A
description of the test points follows:

Dual Voltage NOTICE

Modular
Autotransformer Use a digital voltmeter to measure AC
voltage between TP’s and ground (TP9),
except for TP8.

TP 1 − Not used in this application.

7.24 CONTROLLER TP 2 − Enables the user to check if the high pressure
switch (HPS) is open or closed.
7.24.1 Handling Modules TP 3 − Enables the user to check if the water pressure
switch (WP) contact is open or closed.
! CAUTION TP 4 − Enables the user to check for power availability
to the DUV contact TD.
Do not remove wire harnesses from mod- TP 5 − Enables the user to check if the internal protec-
ule unless you are grounded to the unit tors for the evaporator fan motors (IP-EM1 or IP-EM2)
frame with a static safe wrist strap. are open or closed.
TP 6 (IF EQUIPPED) − Enables the user to check if the
controller liquid injection valve relay (TQ) is open or
! CAUTION closed.
Unplug all module connectors before per- TP 7 − Enables the user to check if the controller econ-
forming arc welding on any part of the omizer solenoid valve relay (TS) is open or closed.
container. TP 8 − Not used in this application.
The guidelines and cautions provided herein should be TP 9 − The chassis (unit frame) ground connection.
followed when handling the modules. These precau- TP 10 − Enables the user to check if the heat termina-
tions and procedures should be implemented when tion thermostat (HTT) contact is open or closed.
replacing a module, when doing any arc welding on the
unit, or when service to the refrigeration unit requires Figure 7.21 Controller Section of the Control Box
handling and removal of a module.

1. Obtain a grounding wrist strap (Carrier Transi- Mounting Screw Controller

cold P/N 07-00304-00) and a static dissipation
mat (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-00277-00). The
wrist strap, when properly grounded, will dissi-
pate any potential static buildup on the body. Controller Software Test
The dissipation mat will provide a static-free Programming Port Points
work surface on which to place and/or service
the modules.

2. Disconnect and secure power to the unit.

3. Place strap on wrist and attach the ground end

to any exposed unpainted metal area on the
refrigeration unit frame (bolts, screws, etc.).

7–23 T-365 Rev B

7.24.3 Controller Programming Procedure 7.24.4 Programming Procedure for Software Ver-
sions 5354 & Greater
With Updated Menu Option
! CAUTION ([Link])
The unit must be OFF whenever a pro-
gramming card is inserted or removed
from the controller programming port. NOTICE
1. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST). Units must be loaded with software ver-
sion 5354 or higher. See the label in the
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card con- control box door for factory installed
taining the following (example) files into the pro- software version. The updated menu
gramming/software port. (See Figure 7.21): option allows the operational software to
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to be loaded, and time and container identi-
select a file/program to upload into the con- fication to be set.
troller.
Procedure for loading Operational Software:
cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file.
1. The display module will display the message Set
3. Turn unit ON, via start-stop switch (ST). UP.

2. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until the dis-

play reads, LOAd 53XX for Scroll.

3. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.

4. The display will alternate to between PrESS

EntR and rEV XXXX.

5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.

6. The display will show the message “Pro SoFt”.

This message will last for up to one minute.

7. The display module will go blank briefly, then

read “Pro donE” when the software loading has
loaded. (If a problem occurs while loading the
software: the display will blink the message “Pro
FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn start-stop switch OFF
and remove the card.)

8. Turn unit OFF, via start-stop switch (ST).

9. Remove the PCMCIA card from the program-

ming/software port and return the unit to normal
operation by placing the start-stop switch in the
ON position.

[Link] power on and wait about 15 seconds for

the new software to load into the controller mem-
ory. The status LED will flash quickly and the dis-
play will remain blank as the controller loads the
new software.

When complete, the controller will reset and

power up normally.

11. Wait for default display, setpoint on the left, and

control temperature on the right.

[Link] software is correct using keypad code

select 18 to view Cd18 XXXX.

[Link] power off. Operational software is loaded.

T-365 Rev B 7–24

Procedure for loading Configuration Software: 3. The first value to be modified is the date in
YYYY MM−DD format. The values will be
1. Turn unit OFF using start-stop switch (ST). entered from right to left. Press the UP or DOWN
2. Insert software/programming PCMCIA card con- ARROW key to increase or decrease the values.
taining the following (example) files into the pro- The ENTER key will enter the information for the
gramming/software port. (See Figure 7.21): current field and move to the next value; the
menuDDMM.ml3, this file allows the user to CODE SELECT key will allow modification of the
select the file/program to upload into the control- previous value.
ler. cfYYMMDD.ml3, multi-configuration file. 4. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
3. Turn unit ON using start-stop switch (ST). 5. The next value to be modified is the time in HH
4. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display MM format. The values will be entered from right
reads Set UP. to left. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to
increase or decrease the values. The ENTER
5. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. key will enter the information for the current field
and move to the next value; the CODE SELECT
6. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display key will allow modification of the previous value.
reads XXXX the message ruN COnFG. (If a
defective card is being used the display will blink 6. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. The date
the message “bAd CArd.” Turn start-stop switch and time will not be committed until start up pro-
OFF and remove the card.) cedures are completed on the next power up.
7. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. Procedure for setting the container ID:
8. The display module will go blank briefly and then
display “551 00”, based on the operational soft-
ware installed.
NOTICE
The characters will be preset to the con-
9. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll
tainer ID already on the controller. If none
through the list to obtain the proper model dash
exist, the default will be AAAA0000000.
number. (If a defective card is being used, the
display will blink the message “bAd CArd.” Turn 1. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display
start-stop switch OFF and remove the card.) reads Set ID.
[Link] the ENTER key on the keypad. 2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad.
11. When software loading has successfully com- 3. Values will be entered from right to left. Press
pleted, the display will show the message the UP or DOWN ARROW key to increase or
“EEPrM donE.” (If a problem occurs while load- decrease the values. ENTER will enter the infor-
ing the software, the display will blink the mes- mation for the current field and move to the next
sage “Pro FAIL” or “bad 12V.” Turn start-stop value; CODE SELECT will allow modification of
switch OFF and remove the card.) [Link] unit the previous value.
OFF using start-stop switch (ST).
4. When the last value is entered, press the
[Link] the PCMCIA card from the program- ENTER key to enter the information to the con-
ming/software port and return the unit to normal troller; the CODE SELECT key will allow modifi-
operation by placing the start-stop switch in the cation of the previous value.
ON position.
7.24.5 Removing and Installing a Controller
[Link] correct model configuration using the
keypad to choose code 20 (CD20). The model Removal:
displayed should match the unit serial number
plate. 1. Disconnect all front wire harness connectors and
move wiring out of way.
Procedure for setting the date and time:
2. The lower controller mounting is slotted, loosen
1. Press the UP or DOWN arrow key until display the top mounting screw (see Figure 7.21) and
reads Set TIM. lift up and out.

2. Press the ENTER key on the keypad. 3. Disconnect the back connectors and remove
module.

7–25 T-365 Rev B

 4. When removing the replacement module from its 4. Using Driver Bit, Carrier Transicold part number
packaging, note how it is packaged. When 07−00418−00, remove the 4 screws securing
returning the old module for service, place it in the display module to the control box. Discon-
the packaging in the same manner as the nect the ribbon cable and set the display module
replacement. The packaging has been designed aside.
to protect the module from both physical and
electrostatic discharge damage during storage
and transit. NOTICE
The battery wires must face toward the
Installation:
right.
Install the module by reversing the removal steps.
Torque values for mounting screws (see Figure 7.21) 5. Remove the old battery from the bracket and
are 0.23 mkg (20 inch-pounds). Torque value for the clean bracket surface. Remove the protective
connectors is 0.12 mkg (10 inch-pounds). backing from the new battery and assemble to
the bracket. Secure battery by inserting the wire
7.24.6 Battery Replacement tie from the back of the bracket around the bat-
tery, and back through the bracket.
Standard Battery Location (Standard Cells):
6. Reconnect the ribbon cable to display and
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power sup- re−install the display.
ply.
7. Route the battery wires from the battery along
2. Slide bracket out and remove old batteries. (See the display harness and connect the red battery
Figure 4.4, Item 8.) wire and one end of the red jumper to “KA14,”
the other end of the red jumper wire to “KA11,”
3. Install new batteries and slide bracket into con- and the black wire to “KA13.”
trol box slot.
8. Replace wire ties that were removed.

! CAUTION 7.25 TEMPERATURE SENSOR SERVICE

Use care when cutting wire ties to avoid Service procedures for the return recorder, return tem-
nicking or cutting wires. perature, supply recorder, supply temperature, ambi-
ent, defrost temperature, evaporator temperature, and
Standard Battery Location (Rechargeable Cells): compressor discharge temperature sensors are pro-
vided in the following sub paragraphs.
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power sup-
ply. 7.25.1 Sensor Checkout Procedure

2. Disconnect battery wire connector from control To verify the accuracy of a temperature sensor:
box. 1. Remove the sensor and place in a 0°C (32°F)
3. Slide out and remove old battery and bracket. ice-water bath. The ice-water bath is prepared
(See Figure 4.4, Item 8.) by filling an insulated container (of sufficient size
to completely immerse bulb) with ice cubes or
4. Slide new battery pack and bracket into the con- chipped ice, then filling voids between ice with
trol box slot. water and agitating until mixture reaches 0°C
(32°F) measured on a laboratory thermometer.
5. Reconnect battery wire connector to control box
and replace wire ties that were removed. 2. Start unit and check sensor reading on the con-
trol panel. The reading should be 0°C (32°F). If
Secure Battery Option (Rechargeable Cells Only): the reading is correct, reinstall sensor; if it is not,
continue with the following.
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power sup-
ply. 3. Turn unit OFF and disconnect power supply.
2. Open control box door and remove both the high 4. Refer to Section 7.24 and remove controller to
voltage shield and clear plastic rain shield (if gain access to the sensor plugs.
installed).
5. Using the plug connector marked “EC” that is
3. Disconnect the battery wires from the “KA” plug connected to the back of the controller, locate
positions 14, 13, 11. the sensor wires (RRS, RTS, SRS, STS, AMBS,
DTS, or CPDS as required). Follow those wires

T-365 Rev B 7–26

to the connector and using the pins of the plug, Due to the variations and inaccuracies in ohm-
measure the resistance. Values are provided in meters, thermometers or other test equipment, a
Table 7–2 and Table 7–3. reading within 2% of the chart value would indi-
cate a good sensor. If a sensor is defective, the
resistance reading will usually be much higher or
lower than the resistance values given.

7–27 T-365 Rev B

Table 7–2 Sensor Resistance

Sensors AMBS, DTS, ETS, RRS, RTS, SRS, STS

C qF Ohms C qF Ohms C qF Ohms C qF Ohms

ï40 ï40 336,500 ï7.8 18 49,060 24.4 76 10,250 56.7 134 2,809
ï38.9 ï38 312,600 ï6.7 20 46,230 25.6 78 9,760 57.8 136 2,697
ï37.8 ï36 290,600 ï5.6 22 43,580 26.7 80 9,299 58.9 138 2,590
ï36.7 ï34 270,300 ï4.4 24 41,100 27.8 82 8,862 60.0 140 2,488
ï35.6 ï32 251,500 ï3.3 26 38,780 28.9 84 8,449 61.1 142 2,390
ï34.4 ï30 234,200 ï2.2 28 36,600 30.0 86 8,057 62.2 144 2,297
ï33.3 ï28 218,200 ï1.1 30 34,560 31.1 88 7,686 63.3 146 2,208
ï32.2 ï26 203,400 0 32 32,650 32.2 90 7,334 64.4 148 2,124
ï31.1 ï24 189,700 1.1 34 30,850 33.3 92 7,000 65.6 150 2,042
ï30 ï22 177,000 2.2 36 29,170 34.4 94 6,684 68.3 155 1,855
ï28.9 ï20 165,200 3.3 38 27,590 35.6 96 6,384 71.1 160 1,687
ï27.8 ï18 154,300 4.4 40 26,100 36.7 98 6,099 73.9 165 1,537
ï26.7 ï16 144,200 5.5 42 24,700 37.8 100 5,828 76.7 170 1,402
ï25.6 ï14 134,800 6.6 44 23,390 38.9 102 5,571 79.4 175 1,281
ï24.4 ï12 126,100 7.7 46 22,160 40.0 104 5,327 82.2 180 1,171
ï23.3 ï10 118,100 8.9 48 20,990 41.1 106 5,095 85.0 185 1,072
ï22.2 ï8 110,500 10 50 19,900 42.2 108 4,874 87.8 190 983
ï21.1 ï6 103,600 11.1 52 18,870 43.3 110 4,665 90.6 195 902
ï20 ï4 97,070 12.2 54 17,900 44.4 112 4,465 93.3 200 829
ï18.9 ï2 91,030 13.3 56 16,980 45.5 114 4,275 96.1 205 762
ï17.8 0 85,400 14.4 58 16,120 46.7 116 4,095 98.9 210 702
ï16.7 2 80,160 15.5 60 15,310 47.8 118 3,923 101.7 215 647
ï15.6 4 75,270 16.6 62 14,540 48.9 120 3,759 104.4 220 598
ï14.4 6 70,720 17.7 64 13,820 50.0 122 3,603 107.2 225 553
ï13.3 8 66,460 18.9 66 13,130 51.1 124 3,454 110.0 230 511
ï12.2 10 62,500 20.0 68 12,490 52.2 126 3,313 112.8 235 473
ï11.1 12 58,790 21.1 70 11,880 53.3 128 3,177 115.6 240 438
ï10.0 14 55,330 22.2 72 11,310 54.4 130 3,049 118.3 245 406
ï8.9 16 52,090 23.3 74 10,760 55.6 132 2,926 121.1 250 378

T-365 Rev B 7–28

Table 7–3 Sensor Resistance

Sensor CPDS

C qF Ohms C qF Ohms C qF Ohms

40 40 2,889,600 38 100.4 49,656 116 240.8 3,759
38 36.4 2,532,872 40 104.0 45,812 118 244.4 3,550
36 32.8 2,225,078 42 107.6 42,294 120 248.0 3,354
34 29.2 1,957,446 44 111.2 39,078 122 251.6 3,173
32 25.6 1,724,386 46 114.8 36,145 124 255.2 3,004
30 22.0 1,522,200 48 118.4 33,445 126 258.8 2,850
28 18.4 1,345,074 50 122.0 30,985 128 262.4 2,711
26 14.8 1,190,945 52 125.6 28,724 130 266.0 2,580
24 11.2 1,056,140 54 129.2 26,651 132 269.6 2,454
22 7.6 938,045 56 132.8 27,750 134 273.2 2,335
20 4.0 834,716 58 136.4 23,005 136 276.8 2,223
18 0.4 743,581 60 140.0 21,396 138 280.4 2,119
16 3.2 663,593 62 143.6 19,909 140 284.0 2,021
14 6.8 593,030 64 147.2 18,550 142 287.6 1,928
12 10.4 530,714 66 150.8 17,294 144 291.2 1,839
10 14.0 475,743 68 154.4 16,133 146 294.8 1,753
8 17.6 426,904 70 158.0 15,067 148 298.4 1,670
6 21.2 383,706 72 161.6 14,078 150 302.0 1,591
4 24.8 345,315 74 165.2 13,158 152 305.6 1,508
2 28.4 311,165 76 168.8 12,306 154 309.2 1,430
0 32.0 280,824 78 172.4 11,524 156 312.8 1,362
2 35.6 253,682 80 176.0 10,793 158 316.4 1,302
4 39.2 229,499 82 179.6 10,122 160 320.0 1,247
6 42.8 207,870 84 183.2 9,494 162 323.6 1,193
8 46.4 188,494 86 186.8 8,918 164 327.2 1,142
10 50.0 171,165 88 190.4 8,376 166 330.8 1,096
12 53.6 155,574 90 194.0 7,869 168 334.4 1,054
14 57.2 141,590 92 197.6 7,404 170 338.0 1,014
16 60.8 129,000 94 201.2 6,972 172 341.6 975
18 64.4 117,656 96 204.8 6,571 174 345.2 938
20 68.0 107,439 98 208.4 6,197 176 348.8 902
22 71.6 98,194 100 212.0 5,848 178 352.4 867
24 75.2 89,916 102 215.6 5,529 180 356.0 834
26 78.8 82,310 104 219.2 5,233 182 359.6 798
28 82.4 75,473 106 222.8 4,953 184 363.2 764
30 83.0 69,281 108 226.4 4,692 186 366.8 733
32 89.6 63,648 110 230.0 4,446 188 370.4 706
34 93.2 58,531 112 233.6 4,204 190 374.0 697
36 96.8 53,887 114 237.2 3,977

7–29 T-365 Rev B

7.25.2 Sensor Replacement 2. Cut cable. Slide the cap and grommet off a bulb
type sensor and save for reuse. Do not cut the
grommet.
! WARNING 3. Cut one wire of existing cable 40 mm (1-1/2
Always turn OFF the unit circuit breaker inches) shorter than the other wire.
(CB-1) and disconnect main power sup-
ply before removing electrical parts. 4. Cut replacement sensor wires (opposite colors)
back 40 mm (1-1/2 inches). (See Figure 7.22.)
1. Turn unit power OFF and disconnect power sup-
ply 5. Strip back insulation on all wiring 6.3 mm (1/4
inch).

NOTICE
Include white date code label when cut-
ting out and removing defective sensors.
The label could be required for warranty
returns.

Figure 7.22 Sensor Types

40 mm (1 1/2 in),
Sensor 2 or 3 wires as required

6.3 mm (1/4 in) Sensor 6.3 mm (1/4 in)

Mounting Stud Type Bulb Type

6. Slide a large piece of heat shrink tubing over the 11. Heat tubing to shrink over splice. Make sure all
cable, and place the two small pieces of heat seams are sealed tightly against the wiring to
shrink tubing, one over each wire, before adding prevent moisture seepage.
crimp fittings as shown in Figure 7.23.

Figure 7.23 Sensor and Cable Splice ! CAUTION

Sensor (Typical) Do not allow moisture to enter wire splice
area as this may affect sensor resistance.
Large Heat Shrink Tubing (1)
[Link] large heat shrink tubing over both splices
and shrink.
Cable Heat Shrink Tubing, 2 or 3 as required
[Link] sensor in unit as shown in Figure 7.23
and re-check sensor resistance:
7. If required, slide the cap and grommet assembly Figure 7.25 − Return Sensor Positioning
onto the replacement sensor. Figure 7.24 − Supply Sensor Positioning
8. Slip crimp fittings over dressed wires (keeping Figure 7.26 − ETS Sensor Positioning
wire colors together). Make sure wires are
pushed into crimp fittings as far as possible and [Link] sensor, refer to:
crimp with crimping tool. Section 7.25.3 − STS and SRS Re-Installation
Section 7.25.4 − RRS and RTS Re-Installation
9. Solder spliced wires with a 60% tin and 40%
lead Rosincore solder. Section 7.25.5 − DTS Re-Installation
Section 7.25.6 − ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installa-
[Link] heat shrink tubing over each splice so that tion
ends of tubing cover both ends of crimp as
shown in Figure 7.23.

T-365 Rev B 7–30

 Figure 7.25 Return Sensor Positioning
NOTICE
The P5 Pre-Trip test must be run to deac-
tivate probe alarms (refer to Section 5.8).

7.25.3 Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation

To properly position a unit supply sensor (Supply Tem-
perature Sensor STS or Supply Recorder Sensor Mounting Return
SRS), Clamp Sensor 1.50 in.
(38.1cm)
the sensor must be fully inserted into the probe holder.
This positioning will give the sensor the optimum
amount of exposure to the supply air stream, and will
allow the Controller to operate correctly. Insufficient 7.25.5 Sensor DTS Re-Installation
probe insertion into the probe holder will result in poor
The Defrost Temperature Sensor (DTS) must have
temperature control due to the lack of air flow over the
insulating material placed completely over the sensor
sensor.
to ensure the coil metal temperature is sensed.
It is also necessary to ensure that the probe tip does
not contact the back panel. The design minimum clear- 7.25.6 Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation
ance of 6 mm (1/4 inch) should be maintained (see The Evaporator Temperature Sensors, ETS1 and
Figure 7.24). ETS2 are located in a tube holder under insulation, as
illustrated in Figure 7.26. When the combo sensor is
Figure 7.24 Supply Sensor Positioning removed and reinstalled, it must be placed in a tube
holder by applying thermal grease. Insulating material
6HQVRU
must completely cover the sensor to ensure the correct
:LUHV &DSDQG*URPPHW
temperature is sensed.
$VVHPEO\
(YDSRUDWRU Figure 7.26 Evaporator Temperature Sensor Posi-
%DFN3DQHO tioning

3UREH Wire Tie

+ROGHU
Insulation
6XSSO\
$LU
6WUHDP

6XSSO\6HQVRU 1.00 in.

ETS Tube Holder (25.4cm)

PP ETS1 and ETS2

LQFK

7.25.7 Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation

7.25.4 Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation To replace the Compressor Discharge Temperature
Reinstall the return sensor (Return Temperature Sen- Sensor, see Figure 7.27:
sor RTS or Return Recorder Sensor RRS), as shown in
Figure 7.25. For proper placement of the return sen- 1. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
sor, be sure to position the enlarged positioning section source and that ST is in OFF position.
of the sensor against the side of the mounting clamp. 2. Remove the existing sensor. Clean all silicone
sealer and dielectric compound from the sensor
well. Ensure well is clean and dry. The top of the
compressor, where the sensor seals, must also
be clean and dry.

7–31 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 7.27 Compressor Discharge Temperature 3. After the enter key has been pressed the display
Sensor will read CAL (for calibration).

4. Press the ALT MODE key and hold for five sec-
SENSOR onds.

5. After the calibration has been completed, Cd45

will display 0 CMH / CFM.
SILICONE BEAD
7.27 EAUTOFRESH SERVICE

7.27.1 Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter

Removing the Air Sample Filter Element

The air sample filter element can be accessed in two
ways:
• Through the eAutoFresh side evaporator access
SENSOR WELL
panel.
• Through the inside of the container by lowering
the upper evaporator panel.
3. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement
sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound 1. By hand, unscrew and remove the filter cup from
into the sensor well. the bottom of the air sample filter assembly.
4. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with 2. Remove the filter element from the filter assem-
the replacement sensor around the sensor seal- bly.
ing ring. Insert sensor into the well with the leads
parallel to the suction fitting. 3. Install the new air sample filter element by
reversing the above steps.
5. Reconnect the sensor (see Figure 7.23) and run
Pre−trip P5. 7.27.2 Checking eAutoFresh Drive System

7.26 VENT POSITION SENSOR (VPS) Checking the Auto Slide:

The vent position sensor (VPS) determines the position
To check with an ohmmeter
of the fresh air vent in near real-time via the Cd55.
Disconnect the four pin connector to the stepper
The fresh air vent position sensor alarm (AL50) will
motor. With a reliable digital ohmmeter, check the
occur if the sensor reading is not stable for four min-
winding resistance. In normal ambient, the motor
utes or if the sensor is outside of its valid range
should have 72 to 84 ohms measured on the red/
(shorted or open). This can occur if the vent is loose or
green (a−b terminals) and on the white/black (c−d
the panel is defective. To confirm a defective panel,
terminals) leads. If an infinite or zero reading
assure that the wing nut is secure and then power
occurs, check connections or replace the motor. If
cycle the unit. If the alarm immediately reappears as
near normal or normal reading occurs, proceed to
active, the panel should be replaced.
the following sections to check out the controller.
The alarm should immediately go inactive, check the 4-
minute stability requirement. If the alarm reoccurs after To check with a SMA−12 portable stepper drive
the four minutes and the panel was known to have tester.
been stable, then the sensor should be replaced.
The SMA−12 portable stepper drive tester (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07−00375−00) is a battery operated
Upper VPS:
stepper drive which will open and close the auto
In order to replace the Upper VPS, the panel must be slide, which allows a more thorough check of the
removed and replaced with another upper fresh air motor.
panel equipped with VPS.
Upon installation, a new VPS assembly requires cali- Checking the Slide Motor:
bration as follows:
1. Turn unit OFF.
1. Rotate the vent to the 0 CMH/ CFM position.
2. Disconnect the four pin connector from the
2. Cd45 will automatically display. Press the Enter Stepper Drive to the Stepper Motor, (see Fig-
key and hold for five seconds. ure 7.28).

T-365 Rev B 7–32

 3. Attach the SMA−12 portable stepper drive 9. To replace the drive module, disconnect all
tester to the Stepper Motor. connectors, unscrew from mounting, and
replace with a NEW drive module in reverse
Figure 7.28 Stepper Components order.

7.27.3 Checking the Controller

Stepper Drive (SD) Stepper Motor (AF)
1. Turn the unit OFF.

2. Disconnect the six pin connector to the stepper

drive from the controller.

3. With a voltmeter set to read 50 volts DC, attach

the positive lead to outlet pin A of the six pin con-
nector, and the negative lead to pin B or TP−9 of
the controller.
4. Set the SMA−12 pulse per second (PPS) to 4. Turn ON the unit for 40 seconds, and watch the
one PPS and press button to open or close voltmeter. There should be approximately 24 to
the valve. Each LED should light sequentially 32 VDC shown on pin A.
until all four are lit. If an LED fails to light, it
indicates an open on that leg caused by a 5. There should be zero volts on pin B.
poor connection or an open coil. Repair or 6. After a short delay, the reading should rise to
replace as required to achieve proper opera- approximately 24 to 32 VDC on pin E.
tion.
7. Pins C and D will have zero to 5 volts transistor
5. Set the SMA−12 step rate to 200 PPS. Press logic (TTL) signals present, however, this can
open or close while watching the slide mech- only be checked with the connector assembled
anism for movement, this is an indication that as this is an open collector type circuit. Checking
the motor is working. the outputs on A, B and E will verify that the con-
6. If the slide moves using the SMA−12, but troller is supplying power to the drive module. To
fails to move when connected in the unit be thorough, and if it is desired, the signals on
(refer to “Checking the Drive Module” in the pins C and D can be checked as follows:
section that follows.) 8. Install a jumper assembly (Carrier part number
07−00408−00) to connect the drive module and
Checking the Drive Module: controller connectors as shown in Figure 7.29.
1. Turn unit OFF. 9. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to test
2. Disconnect the four pin connector to the connector socket C and negative lead to socket
Stepper Motor. B, and run as before by resetting unit.

3. With a voltmeter set to read 24 volts AC, [Link] for sockets D and B.
attach the positive lead to the drive module
outlet pin A (wire 1A) of the four pin connec- Figure 7.29 Jumper Assembly
tor and the negative lead to the B pin (wire
1B). Controller Drive Module
Connector (EC) Connector (SD)
4. Turn ON unit, and watch the volt meter. After
a short delay, the reading should rise to A
B
approximately 12 volts. A
C
D B
5. Repeat for pins C and D (wires 2A and 2B). C
E
D
6. If only one set of pins reads a voltage, check E
connections and retest. Test
Connector Jumper
7. If the retest reads out the same, the drive
module or controller is faulty.

8. If no voltage is present in any step, the output

from the controller to the drive module may
be faulty. Check the connections and wires
from the controller to the drive module.

7–33 T-365 Rev B

There should be approximately five volts DC on sock- 5. Mount the replacement motor cup assembly in
ets “C” and “D” (S1 and S2) when measured as above. the panel using original screws. Torque screws
If not the connections or controller is faulty. If any of to 0.29 mkg (25 +/− 1 Inch pounds).
these pins are not consistent, the connections or the
controller is suspect. Check and replace as required. 6. Reapply sealer to the inside and the outside of
the motor cup assembly.
7.27.4 Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System
7. Mount the upper & lower rails, slide plate and
gasket plate using original hardware. Apply
To replace the Drive Motor Assembly:
thread sealant and torque screws to 0.29 mkg
1. Remove the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh (25 +/− 1 Inch pounds).
Panel (3, Figure 7.30) to the front of the unit.
8. Mount grille assembly using original hardware.
Reach in, cut tie wrap, and disconnect the motor
Apply thread sealant and torque screws to 0.29
connector. Bring panel to work area.
mkg (25 +/−1 Inch pounds).
2. Remove four screws fastening the grille.
9. Reconnect the motor connector.
3. Remove six screws fastening the rails, the slide
[Link] the bolts that secure the eAutoFresh
plate and the gasket plate. Set components
Panel to the front of the unit.
aside for reassembly.
11. Carry out functional test. Refer to Section 5.4.3
4. Remove the four screws fastening the motor cup
step c.
to the panel. Cut sealer on outside and inside of
motor cup assembly. Push out the motor cup
assembly from the rear of the panel.

Figure 7.30 Motor Cup Replacement

Connector

Tie Wrap

eAutoFresh Panel

Top Rail Grille

Gasket Plate
Grill Screws
Motor Cup

Slide Plate

Connector

Bottom Rail Rail Screws

Motor Cup Screws

T-365 Rev B 7–34

7.28 MAINTENANCE OF PAINTED SURFACES sioned, a provision wiring kit (Carrier Transicold part
number 76-00685-00) must be installed. Installation
The refrigeration unit is protected by a special paint
instructions are packaged with the kit.
system against the corrosive atmosphere in which it
normally operates. However, should the paint system
To install the module:
be damaged, the base metal can corrode. In order to
protect the refrigeration unit from the highly corrosive
sea atmosphere, or if the protective paint system is
scratched or damaged, clean the area to bare metal
! WARNING
using a wire brush, emery paper or equivalent cleaning Installation requires wiring to the main
method. Immediately following cleaning, apply paint to unit circuit breaker, CB1. Make sure the
the area, and allow to dry. Refer to the Parts List for power to the unit is off and power plug
proper paint selection. disconnected before beginning installa-
tion.
7.29 COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE
INSTALLATION 1. CB1 is connected to the power system, see wir-
ing schematic. Ensure that the unit power is off
Figure 7.31 Communications Interface Installation AND that the unit power plug is disconnected.

2. Open control box, (see Figure 7.31) and remove

low voltage shield. Open high voltage shield.

3. If using factory provisioned wiring, remove the

circuit breaker panel, with circuit breaker, from
the control box. Locate, wires CB21/CIA3,
CB22/CIA5 and CB23/CIA7 that have been tied
back in the wire harness. Remove the protective
heat shrink from the ends of the wires.

4. Refit the circuit breaker panel.

5. Fit the new CIM into the unit.

6. Attach three wires CB21/CIA3, CB22/CIA5 and

CB23/CIA7 to the CIM at connection CIA.
CB1 Communications 7. Locate connectors CIA and CIB, remove plugs if
required, and attach to the module.
Units that have been factory provisioned for installation
8. Replace the low voltage shield.
of a Communication Interface Module (CIM) have the
required wiring installed. If the unit is not factory provi-

7–35 T-365 Rev B

Table 7–4 R-134a Temperature - Pressure Chart

Temperature Vacuum Temperature Pressure

F C “/hg cm/hg kg/cm2 bar F C psig kPa kg/cm2 bar
-40 -40 14.6 49.4 37.08 0.49 28 -2 24.5 168.9 1.72 1.69
-35 -37 12.3 41.6 31.25 0.42 30 -1 26.1 180.0 1.84 1.80
-30 -34 9.7 32.8 24.64 0.33 32 0 27.8 191.7 1.95 1.92
-25 -32 6.7 22.7 17.00 0.23 34 1 29.6 204.1 2.08 2.04
-20 -29 3.5 11.9 8.89 0.12 36 2 31.3 215.8 2.20 2.16

-18 -28 2.1 7.1 5.33 0.07 38 3 33.2 228.9 2.33 2.29
40 4 35.1 242.0 2.47 2.42
-16 -27 0.6 2.0 1.52 0.02
45 7 40.1 276.5 2.82 2.76
Temperature Pressure
50 10 45.5 313.7 3.20 3.14
F C psig kPa kg/cm2 bar
55 13 51.2 353.0 3.60 3.53
-14 -26 0.4 1.1 0.03 0.03
60 16 57.4 395.8 4.04 3.96
-12 -24 1.2 8.3 0.08 0.08
65 18 64.1 441.0 4.51 4.42
-10 -23 2.0 13.8 0.14 0.14
70 21 71.1 490.2 5.00 4.90
-8 -22 2.9 20.0 0.20 0.20
75 24 78.7 542.6 5.53 5.43
-6 -21 3.7 25.5 0.26 0.26
80 27 86.7 597.8 6.10 5.98
-4 -20 4.6 31.7 0.32 0.32
85 29 95.3 657.1 6.70 6.57
-2 -19 5.6 36.6 0.39 0.39
90 32 104.3 719.1 7.33 7.19
0 -18 6.5 44.8 0.46 0.45
95 35 114.0 786.0 8.01 7.86
2 -17 7.6 52.4 0.53 0.52
100 38 124.2 856.4 8.73 8.56
4 -16 8.6 59.3 0.60 0.59
105 41 135.0 930.8 9.49 9.31
6 -14 9.7 66.9 0.68 0.67
110 43 146.4 1009 10.29 10.09
8 -13 10.8 74.5 0.76 0.74
115 46 158.4 1092 11.14 10.92
10 -12 12.0 82.7 0.84 0.83
120 49 171.2 1180 12.04 11.80
12 -11 13.2 91.0 0.93 0.91
125 52 184.6 1273 12.98 12.73
14 -10 14.5 100.0 1.02 1.00
130 54 198.7 1370 13.97 13.70
16 -9 15.8 108.9 1.11 1.09
135 57 213.6 1473 15.02 14.73
18 -8 17.1 117.9 1.20 1.18
140 60 229.2 1580 16.11 15.80
20 -7 18.5 127.6 1.30 1.28
145 63 245.6 1693 17.27 16.93
22 -6 19.9 137.2 1.40 1.37
150 66 262.9 1813 18.48 18.13
24 -4 21.4 147.6 1.50 1.48
155 68 281.1 1938 19.76 19.37
26 -3 22.9 157.9 1.61 1.58

T-365 Rev B 7–36

Table 7–5 Recommended Bolt Torque Values

BOLT DIA. THREADS TORQUE Nm

FREE SPINNING
#4 40 5.2 in-lbs 0.6
#6 32 9.6 in-lbs 1.1
#8 32 20 in-lbs 2.0
#10 24 23 in-lbs 2.5
1/4 20 75 in-lbs 8.4
5/16 18 11 ft-lbs 15
3/8 16 20 ft-lbs 28
7/16 14 31 ft-lbs 42
1/2 13 43 ft-lbs 59
9/16 12 57 ft-lbs 78
5/8 11 92 ft-lbs 127
3/4 10 124 ft-lbs 171

NONFREE SPINNING (LOCKNUTS ETC.)

1/4 20 82.5 in-lbs 9.3
5/16 18 145.2 in-lbs 16.4
3/8 16 22.0 ft-lbs 23
7/16 14 34.1 ft-lbs 47
1/2 13 47.3 ft-lbs 65
9/16 12 62.7 ft-lbs 86
5/8 11 101.2 ft-lbs 139
3/4 10 136.4 ft-lbs 188

7–37 T-365 Rev B

 SECTION 8
ELECTRICAL WIRING SCHEMATIC AND DIAGRAMS
8.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains the Electrical Schematics and Wiring Diagrams.

Figure 8.1 Legend

SYMBOL DESCRIPTION SYMBOL DESCRIPTION

AIM AUTOFRESH INTERFACE MODULE (Dï24) ICF INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR FRONT (Tï23)
AMBS AMBIENT SENSOR (Cï23) ICR INTERROGATOR CONNECTOR REAR (Tï24)
C CONTROLLER (Lï21) IP INTERNAL PROTECTOR (Eï14, Fï11, Gï14)
CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER ï 460 VOLT (Jï1) IRL IN RANGE LIGHT (OPTION) (Kï15)
CB2 OPTIONAL CIRCUIT BREAKER ï DVM (OPTION) LC CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (LOW SPEED) (K15)
(Dï1) TERMINAL BLOCK WHEN CB2 NOT PRESENT
OS O2 SENSOR (H24)
CF CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (Nï8, Lï12)
OS O2 SENSOR AMPLIFIER (K24)
CH COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR (Lï10, Pï1)
PA UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Kï8, Lï8, Nï1)
CI COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MODULE (OPTION)
(Aï4) PB UNIT PHASE CONTACTOR (Kï8, Lï8, Nï3)
CL COOL LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï14) PR USDA PROBE RECEPTACLE (Mï24, Nï24, Pï24)
CM CONDENSER FAN MOTOR (Eï11, Gï12, Tï10) PTC1 PTC FOR VENT POSITIONING SENSOR (UPPER)
(Nï17)
COS CO2 SENSOR (Fï24)
RM REMOTE MONITORING RECEPTACLE (OPTION)
CP COMPRESSOR MOTOR (Tï4) (Kï7, Lï7, Kï14, Lï14, Kï16, Lï16)
CPDS DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï23) RRS RETURN RECORDER SENSOR (Cï23)
CS CURRENT SENSOR (Mï2) RTS RETURN TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Bï23)
DHBL DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM LEFT (Rï8) SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï23)
DHBR DEFROST HEATER ï BOTTOM RIGHT (Tï7) SRS SUPPLY RECORDER SENSOR (Lï23)
DHML DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE LEFT (Rï7) SS SENSOR SWITCH MODULE (P24)
DHMR DEFROST HEATER ï MIDDLE RIGHT (Tï7) ST START ï STOP SWITCH (Kï5)
DHTL DEFROST HEATER ï TOP LEFT (Rï7) STS SUPPLY TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Aï23)
DHTR DEFROST HEATER ï TOP RIGHT (Tï8) TC CONTROLLER RELAYïCOOLING (Jï9)
DL DEFROST LIGHT (OPTION) (Lï7) TCC TRANSFRESH COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTOR
(OPTION) (Dï6)
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Kï23)
DTS DEFROST TEMPERATURE SENSOR (Cï23) TCP CONTROLLER RELAY ï PHASE SEQUENCING
(Jï7, Jï8)
DLV DIGITAL LOADER VALVE (Fï24)
TD CONTROLLER RELAY (DUV) (J12)
DUV DIGITAL UNLOADER VALVE (Lï13)
TE CONTROLLER RELAY ï HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR
DVM DUAL VOLTAGE MODULE (OPTIONAL) (Dï1) FANS (Jï15)
DVR DUAL VOLTAGE RECEPTACLE (OPTIONAL) (Fï3)
TH CONTROLLER RELAY ï HEATING (Jï16)
EEV EVAPORATOR EXPANSION VALVE (Rï16)
TF CONTROLLER RELAY ï DEFROST (Eï7)
EF EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïHIGH SPEED TG CONTROLLER RELAY ï (CONDENSER FAN SPEED)
(Mï15, Lï14) (H11)
EM EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Tï13, Tï15, Eï15, Fï15, TI INïRANGE RELAY (Jï15)
Gï15)
EPT EVAPORATOR PRESSURE TRANSDUCER (Hï23) TL CONTROLLER RELAY ï COOL LIGHT (Jï14)
TN CONTROLLER RELAY ï CONDENSER FAN (Dï10)
ES EVAPORATOR FAN CONTACTORïLOW SPEED
(Pï10, Lï14) TP TEST POINT (Hï9, Fï10, Hï12, Gï13, Hï13,
Gï15, Lï17)
ETS EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SUCTION)
(Dï23) TR TRANSFORMER (Mï3)
ESV ECONOMIZER SOLENOID VALVE (Jï10) TRANS AUTO TRANSFORMER 230/460 (OPTION) (Dï3)
F FUSE (Cï7, Dï7, Fï21, Gï21) TRC TRANSFRESH REAR CONNECTOR (OPTION) (Eï7)
FS CONDENSER FAN CONTACTOR (HIGH SPEED TS CONTROLLER RELAY ï ECONOMIZER SOLENOID
SHORTING) (M2) VALVE (Eï10)
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS TV CONTROLLER RELAY ï LOW SPEED EVAPORATOR
FANS (Jï14)
HPS HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH (Gï9)
VPS VENT POSITION SENSOR (UPPER) (Nï17)
HR HEATER CONTACTOR (Nï7, Lï15)
WCR WETTING CURRENT RESISTOR (OPTION) (Jï13)
HS HUMIDITY SENSOR (OPTIONAL) (Fï23)
WP WATER PRESSURE SWITCH (OPTION) (Eï13)
HTT HEAT TERMINATION THERMOSTAT (Eï15)

8–1 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 8.2 Unit Wiring Diagram

Based on Drawing 62ï11755

T-365 Rev B 8–2

Figure 8.3 Wiring Diagram

Based on Drawing 62ï11755

8–3 T-365 Rev B

 Figure 8.4 Wiring Diagram

Based on Drawing 62ï11755

T-365 Rev B 8–4

 INDEX

Numerics Control Box 2–1

Control Box Section 3–5
230 Volt Cable 2–2
Controller 2–2, 4–3, 7–23
460 Volt Cable 2–2
Controller Alarm Indications 4–32
Controller Alarms 4–13
A Controller Configuration Variables 4–21
Adding Refrigerant to System (Full Charge) 7–6 Controller Function Codes 4–22
Adding Refrigerant to System (Partial Charge) 7–6 Controller Pre-Trip Test Codes 4–46
Adjust Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2 Controller Sequence and Modes of Operation 4–5
Air−Cooled Condenser Section 3–4 Controller Software 4–4
Alarm Configuration (dCF07 − dCF10) 4–18 Controller Troubleshooting 7–23
Assemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–14
Autotransformer 2–2, 7–22 D
Datacorder 4–14
B DataCORDER Alarms 4–20
Back Panels 2–2 DataCORDER Communications 4–18
Battery 2–1 Datacorder Description 4–14
DataCORDER Power Up 4–18
C DataCORDER Software 4–15
Defrost 4–10
Cable Restraint 2–2
Defrost Operation 4–10
Check Controller Function Codes 5–6
Defrost Related Parameters 4–12
Checking eAutoFresh Drive System 7–32
Dehumidification 2–1
Checking High Pressure Switch 7–9
Digital Loader Valve 7–19
Checking the Controller 7–33
Digital Unloader Valve 7–20
Checking the Refrigerant Charge 7–5
Disassemble the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–14
Communications Interface Module 2–2, 3–5
Display Module 4–3
Communications Interface Module Installation 7–35
Complete Inspection 5–6
Compressor 2–1, 7–6
E
Compressor High Temperature Protection 4–12 eAutoFresh 2–3
Compressor Low Pressure Protection 4–13 eAutoFresh Modes of Operation 5–4
Compressor Section 3–3 eAutoFresh OPERATION 5–3
Condenser Coil 2–1, 7–10 eAutoFresh Pre−Trip Inspection 5–3
Condenser Coil Cleaning 7–10 eAutoFresh Service 7–32
Condenser Coil Installation 7–11 eAutoFresh Start−Up Procedure 5–4
Condenser Coil Preparation 7–11 Economized Operation 3–9
Condenser Coil Removal 7–10 Economizer Expansion Valve 7–17
Condenser Fan and Fan Motor 7–12 Economizer Solenoid Valve 7–16
Condenser Fan Motor Remove/Replace 7–12 Electrical System Data 3–7
Condenser Fan Operation 2–1 Electronic Expansion Valve 7–16
Condenser Fan Override 4–13 Evacuation and dehydration 7–4
Condenser Grille 2–3 Evacuation and Dehydration, Complete System 7–4
Configuration Identification 2–1 Evacuation and Dehydration, General 7–4
Configuration Software (CnF Variables) 4–4 Evacuation and Dehydration, Partial System 7–5
Connect Power 5–1 Evacuation and Dehydration, Preparation 7–4
Connect Remote Monitoring Receptacle 5–5 Evaporator 2–1
Connection To 190/230 VAC Power 5–1 Evaporator Coil & Heater Assembly 7–13
Connection To 380/460 VAC Power 5–1 Evaporator Coil Replacement 7–13

Index-1 T-365 Rev B

Evaporator Fan and Motor Assembly 7–14 M
Evaporator Fan Operation 2–1, 4–12
Maintenance of Painted Surfaces 7–35
Evaporator Heater Replacement 7–13
Maintenance Precautions 1–1
Evaporator Section 3–2
Manifold Gauge Set 7–1
Evaporator Section Cleaning 7–15

F O
Operating Precautions 1–1
Failure Action 4–12
Operational Software (Cd Function Codes) 4–4
Feature Descriptions 2–1
Option Descriptions 2–1
Filter Drier 7–13
First Aid 1–1
Fresh Air Makeup Vent 3–1
P
Frozen “Heat” Mode 4–9 Perishable Dehumidification 4–6
Frozen Economy Mode 4–9 Perishable Dehumidification - Bulb Mode 4–7
Frozen Idle Mode 4–9 Perishable Economy 4–7
Frozen Mode - Temperature Control 4–8 Perishable Heating 4–5
Frozen Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–10 Perishable Idle, Air Circulation 4–5
Frozen Steady State 4–9 Perishable Mode - System Pressure Regulation 4–13
Perishable Mode - Trim Heat 4–8
G Perishable Mode Cooling - Sequence of Operation 4–7
Perishable Mode Heating - Sequence of Operation 4–8
General Description 3–1
Perishable Mode Temperature Control 4–5
General Safety Notices 1–1
Perishable Pulldown 4–5
Generator Protection 4–12
Perishable Steady State 4–5
Gutters 2–2
Physical Inspection 5–6
Plate Set 2–1
H
Pre−Trip Data Recording 4–18
Handles 2–2 Pressure Readout 2–1
Handling Modules 7–23 Pre-Trip Diagnosis 5–6
High Pressure Switch 7–9 Pre-Trip Diagnostics 4–14
Probe Diagnostics 5–7
I Programming Procedure for Software Versions 5354
and Greater 7–24
Inspection (Before Loading) 5–1
PROTECTION MODES OF OPERATION 4–12
Installing the Digital Loader Valve 7–19
Pump Down the Unit 7–3
Interrogator 2–2
Introduction 2–1
Introduction to Electrical Schematics and Wiring Dia-
Q
grams 8–1 QUEST − CCPC 4–13
ISO Trip Header 4–20 Quest − CCPC 2–2

K R
Key Pad 4–2 Refrigerant Charge 7–5
Refrigerant Leak Checking 7–3
L Refrigeration Circuit 3–9
Labels 2–2 Refrigeration System Data 3–6
Logging Interval (dCF03) 4–16 Refrigeration Unit - Front Section 3–1
Lower Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–2 Remote Monitoring 2–2
Lower Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2 Removal and Replacement of Compressor 7–6
Removing and Installing a Controller 7–25
Replacing a Battery 7–26

T-365 Rev B Index-2

Replacing a Sensor 7–30 Starting and Stopping Instructions 5–5
Replacing Electronic Expansion Valve and Strainer 7– Starting the Unit 5–6
16 Start-Up Inspection 5–6
Replacing High Pressure Switch 7–10 Stopping the Unit 5–6
Replacing the Digital Loader Valve 7–19
Replacing the Digital Unloader Valve 7–20 T
Replacing the Evaporator Fan Assembly 7–14
Temperature Control Microprocessor System 4–1
Temperature Readout 2–1
S
Temperature Sensor Service 7–26
Safety and Protective Devices 3–8 Thermistor Format (dCF04) 4–16
Sampling Type (dCF05 & dCF06) 4–18 Thermometer Port 2–2
Section Layout 7–1 Troubleshooting the P6-7 (DLV/DUV) 7–18
Sensor Checkout Procedure 7–26
Sensor Configuration (dCF02) 4–15 U
Sensor DTS Re-Installation 7–31
Upper Air (Fresh Air Make Up) 2–2
Sensor, CPDS Re-Installation 7–31
Upper Fresh Air Makeup Vent 5–2
Sensors ETS1 and ETS2 Re-Installation 7–31
USDA 2–2
Sensors RRS and RTS Re-Installation 7–31
USDA Cold Treatment 4–19
Sensors STS and SRS Re-Installation 7–31
USDA Cold Treatment Procedure 4–19
Service Connections 7–2
Servicing the eAutoFresh Air Filter 7–32
Servicing the eAutoFresh Drive System 7–34
V
Specific Hazard Statements 1–1 Vent Position Sensor 5–3
Standard Operation 3–9 Vent Position Sensor (VPS) 7–32
Start Temperature Recorder DataCORDER 5–6
Start up - Compressor Bump Start 4–5 X
Start Up - Compressor Phase Sequence 4–5
XtendFRESH 2–3

Index-3 T-365 Rev B

T-365 Rev B Index–4
A member of the United Technologies Corporation. Stock symbol UTX.

Carrier Transicold Division,

Carrier Corporation
P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA

[Link]